JP7364235B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, pachinko gaming machines are equipped with a microcomputer that includes processing measures such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) that executes predetermined control and storage devices such as a RAM (Random Access Memory) that stores data (Patent Document (see 1).

JP2019-181256A

However, the microcomputer may be initialized or malfunction due to some influence. As a result, data stored in the microcomputer may become abnormal.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can restore stored data when the data becomes abnormal.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
In a gaming machine equipped with a control means capable of executing predetermined control and a storage means capable of storing predetermined data,
The storage means includes a first storage section and a second storage section,
The first storage unit stores, as main data, data representing specific matters that can be changed as the game progresses;
The second storage unit stores a plurality of pieces of data representing the specific matter as sub data,
The control means includes:
When the specific matter changes as the game progresses, the main data is updated according to the change,
updating all of the plurality of sub-data at the same timing based on the main data;
If it is determined that at least a portion of the storage means including the first storage section and the second storage section is abnormal, a predetermined condition is satisfied for the plurality of sub-data stored in the second storage section. If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the main data may be newly generated based on the plurality of sub data and stored in the first storage unit. characterized by something.

According to the present invention, when stored data becomes abnormal, it is possible to restore the data.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view illustrating the standby state of the movable plate body, (B) is a front view illustrating the moving state of the movable plate body, and (C) is a front view illustrating the rotating state of the movable plate body. It is a front view of display devices. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side. (A) is a table showing general map related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special pattern related determination information. (A) is a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of a reach determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 1st look-ahead determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of a background image for probability variation, and FIG. 3E is a diagram showing an example of a background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening performance, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round performance, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending performance. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation effect with no reach. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure variation performance until reaching the reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach, and is a continuation of Drawing 23. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. 26 is a diagram showing an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 25. FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 26. It is a figure showing an example of a movable object production. It is a figure showing an example of operation performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a hold performance. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of sensor detection processing. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 35. FIG. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of production control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view schematically showing a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment. It is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side and the frame control board side according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of frame control main processing concerning a 1st embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing in frame control main processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of frame control side timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of the number-of-balls restoration process. It is a flowchart showing an example of launch control processing. It is a time chart showing an example of game ball launch control when the launch handle continues to be operated. It is a flowchart showing an example of ball possession management processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of fraud detection processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of firing prohibition processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of game ball entry prevention processing. (A) is a diagram showing a front view of the game board according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 60 (A) when the entry prevention device is in a standby state. 60(C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 60(A) when the intrusion prevention device is in an activated state. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing in a 1st embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of operation confirmation processing. It is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side and the frame control board side according to the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of frame control side timer interrupt processing according to the second embodiment. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of fraud detection processing according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of difference ball count management processing.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characteristic parts of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In addition, in the following, in order to simplify the description, by writing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. for the symbol or code will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine Pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko game machine PY refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko game machine PY. Furthermore, "front" refers to the direction from the pachinko machine PY approaching the player facing the pachinko machine PY, and "backward" refers to the direction approaching the pachinko machine PY from the player facing the pachinko machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1, and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU inside. The gaming machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 that is fixed to the gaming parlor, an inner frame 22 that is attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame that is rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. A door 23 is provided.

The outer circumferential shapes of the outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 when viewed from the front are approximately the same. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23m having a large substantially vertically rectangular opening formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted into the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY cannot visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front side of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. Note that a transparent glass plate may be used as the transparent plate 23t instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed through the transparent plate 23t from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY.

A firing handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the firing handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the magnitude of the force applied to the game ball (shooting strength) in order to fire the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the firing handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23m, an upper plate 34 that largely protrudes forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operating portion of the first performance button 40k that visibly protrudes from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is shaped into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper tray 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A is formed for storing game balls to be supplied to the firing handle 72k. Further, on the upper surface of the lower tray 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A is provided for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Furthermore, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 that protrude forward are provided above, on the right side, and on the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, are arranged facing downward and arranged in the left and right direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. Further, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower part of the right side decorative body 32. The operation part of the second performance button 41k is shaped like a rod. Furthermore, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right side decorative body 32 to the right front portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left side decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. 1. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. An opening 1A is formed approximately in the center of the game board 1 and is approximately circular when viewed from the front.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decoration body 61 is formed to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decoration body 61, there is an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration body 61, and an outer rail 62 between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration body 61. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61.

On the front surface of the game board 1, an area surrounded by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, etc. forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a firing area 7 through which the fired game balls can pass to head toward the gaming area 6.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the firing handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nails are used to properly control game balls that enter the game area 6 and flow down the game area 6 into the general prize opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that leads to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decoration body 61 in the gaming area 6. The first starting winning device 11D has a first starting opening 11 formed into which a game ball can enter. The first starting winning device 11D has a non-operating structure. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Note that a warp portion 61w is formed from the left side to the lower end of the center decoration body 61 to allow the game ball to pass therethrough. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decorative body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp section 61w passes through the inside of the warp section 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp section 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end of the center decorative body 61. A downward guide portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided at the tip of the stage 61s. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below this downward guide portion 61y.

Directly below the first starting port 11 in the gaming area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an electric tube opening/closing member 12k included in the electric tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from the retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the gaming area 6. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the second starting port 12 is opened to allow entry of a ball. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball, and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. Note that the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

On the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the gaming area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13, a big winning device 14D is provided. The grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a grand prize opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an AT opening/closing member 14k included in the big winning device 14D. That is, the big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a generally horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big prize opening 14. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that its upper end is tilted forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k comes into a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the big prize opening 14 is opened to allow entry of a ball.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game ball enters the big prize opening 14, a predetermined number (in the basic embodiment, one game ball) is paid out as a prize ball. In addition, the game ball that entered the big prize opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the big winning device 14D in the gaming area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and a guiding path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided in the gaming area 6 (the front surface of the gaming board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the front. Note that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 14, and the general winning port 10, and the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 13 are collectively described as the first starting port 11, They are collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 6B on the right side. The manner in which the firing handle 72k is operated to fire the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is referred to as "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, the operation mode of the firing handle 72k that fires the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right-handed hitting".

In the gaming area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with left-hand hitting is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with right-hand hitting. This flow path is called a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the big prize opening 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting the ball to the right.

In addition, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained. The board effect unit EU is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board presentation unit EU.

The image display device 50 is configured with a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display section 50a capable of displaying 3D images. The image display device 50 is placed several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The platen movable body 55k includes a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state where the board movable body 55k is placed in the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downwardly moved from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that in the standby state, only a part of the lower end of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player, and the majority is invisible to the player (see FIG. 3(A)).

Then, the movable plate 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the platen movable body 55k is located approximately at the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined work position can be set as appropriate, and may be a position where the movable plate 55k is located above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). Note that the rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be performed when the movable platen body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, while being held at the operating position, and when moving from the operating position to the standby position.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, a description will be given of the display devices 8 disposed to the right of approximately the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (the part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special pattern 1 display 81a that variably displays a first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 1"), a second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 2") ''), and a regular symbol display 82 that variably displays a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol"). In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 holding display 83a that displays the number of special drawings 1 held, which will be described later, and a special drawing 2 holding display 83b, which displays the number of special drawings 2 holding, which will be described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is carried out triggered by the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 12. The special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing will be described later. In addition, in the following explanation, special map 1 and special map 2 will be collectively referred to as "special map", and special map 1 lottery and special map 2 lottery will be collectively referred to as "special map lottery". In addition, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the "special figure display 81." Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the "special figure reservation display 83."

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a jackpot game with opening of the jackpot 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: off), 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the LED on the far right lights up as "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The manner in which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner is, for example, a manner in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs blinking at once unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately. Specifically, this is the case when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 during execution of variable display of special figures or during execution of a jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning prize. This reserved special drawing drawing and the variable display of the special drawing are called "special drawing reservation."

The special drawing reservation includes the special drawing 1 drawing that was held based on the prize won in the first starting opening 11, and "special drawing 1 pending" which represents the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning winning in the second starting opening 12. There is a special drawing 2 lottery held based on , and a "special drawing 2 pending" representing a variable display of special drawing 2. Then, the special figure 1 pending display 83a displays the number of special figure 1 pending, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 drawings and variable displays of special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 pending display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 drawings and the number of variable displays of special figure 2.

It is also possible to set an upper limit on the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations, or not to set them. In addition, when setting upper limits to the number of special symbols 1 and 2 reserved, the number of special symbols 1 and 2 can be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special drawings 1 and the number of special drawings 2 being held is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and the special figure is displayed by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold. Displays the number of Figure 1 reservations and Special Figure 2 reservations. In addition, in the following, the number of special drawings 1 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 1 reserved (U1)", and the number of special symbols 2 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2)". In addition, the "number of reserved special drawings 1" and "number of reserved special drawings 2" are collectively referred to as the "number of reserved special drawings." Furthermore, the "special figure 1 holding display 83a" and the "special drawing 2 holding display 83b" are collectively referred to as the "special drawing holding display 83."

Further, the variable display of the common symbol is executed when a common symbol lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball at the gate 13. The variable display of the common map notifies the result of the common map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stationary displayed ordinary map (stopped ordinary map) is identification information representing the result of the ordinary map lottery drawn as a display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure, an auxiliary game accompanied by opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The general figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general map display device 82 represents the general map corresponding to the result of the general map lottery, that is, the result of the general map lottery. If the result of the general lottery is a win, both LEDs will eventually light up as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). This lighting mode is a winning symbol and represents a win. Furthermore, if the result of the general drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED will finally light up, such as "■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. In the basic embodiment, the mode of fluctuating display of the common map is such that both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of the fluctuating display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs flashing at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained based on FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY, there is a game control board 100 that performs control (progress of the game) related to games that can obtain gaming profits, and a Power is supplied to the production control board 120 that controls the production, the image control board 140 that controls images, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, and each of the boards 100, 120, 140, and 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches the power on/off.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 is mounted on the game control board 100, which controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. In addition, games in which gaming profits can be obtained that are controlled by the game control board 100 include special drawing lottery, variable display of special drawings, jackpot games, game state setting described later, general drawing lottery, and variable display of normal drawings. , auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary hit determination table, which will be described later. Game control tables, etc. are stored. Note that the gaming ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage section 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage section 105 will be explained. As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, special drawings can be reserved, but if special drawings can be reserved, that is, if the number of special symbols reserved is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery etc. is obtained based on this winning prize. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the first starting port 11 is referred to as "special map 1 related judgment information", and the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12. The determination information that is determined is referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information." In addition, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information."

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Moreover, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning hole 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The big winning hole sensor 14a detects the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

In addition, the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to display devices 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a firing device 72 is also connected thereto. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY and allows balls to be rented based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls that are paid out are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting them.

Further, the firing device 72 is a device that fires game balls. The firing handle 72k constitutes an operation section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the firing device 72 to fire a game ball, and is included in the firing device 72. The firing handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact of a person such as a player with the firing handle 72k. When the player operates the firing handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the firing handle 72k, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the firing control circuit 175.

Furthermore, a firing volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the firing handle 72k is connected to the firing handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing motor 72m so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine PY, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the firing handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information regarding the game to the performance control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The production control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the production control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the production control board 120. That is, between the game control board 100 and the performance control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. The production control board 120 can be positioned as a production control unit that controls production, together with an image control board 140, an audio control circuit 161, and a sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the performance control section includes at least a performance control board 120, and performs game performance, customer waiting performance, and operation promotion using performance devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.). It is sufficient if it is possible to control the presentation.

The performances that are controlled by the performance control board 120 include game performances (special figure fluctuation performances, hold performances, jackpot game performances, etc.), customer waiting performances, and operations of the first performance button 40k and the second performance button 41k. It includes operation promotion effects that encourage operation during the valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123 that stores programs. It includes a presentation CPU 122 that executes a program.

The production ROM 123 stores programs for performing production control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1ms timer interrupt processing, 10ms timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The performance RAM 124 includes a starting winning command suspension storage section 125 that stores starting winning commands that will be described later, a symbol designation command storage section 126 that stores symbol designation commands that will be described later, and a special symbol that stores special symbol fluctuation start commands that will be described later. A fluctuation start command storage section 127 is provided.

Further, an image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the performance control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Have them do it. Note that the connection between the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video Memory) that is used to expand the image data stored in the CGROM 145. Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or a portion of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, designs, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50. (including designs) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured with a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources are connected to the production control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the production control board 120. Moreover, the production control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the performance control board 120 include a first performance button sensor 40a and a second performance button sensor 41a. The first performance button sensor 40a detects that the first performance button 40k is pressed. The second performance button sensor 41a detects that the second performance button 41k is pressed. When the first performance button sensor 40a and the second performance button sensor 41a detect that each has been operated, they output a signal to the performance control board 120 according to the detected content.

Note that the type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the production control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the performance control board 120 include a rotating member motor 55m1 and a lifting member motor 55m2. The rotating member motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The elevating member motor 55m2 can raise or lower the elevating member 55k2. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, below, the operation|movement of "the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively called "the operation|movement of the board movable body 55k." Furthermore, rotating the rotary member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the movable platen body 55k."

Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that the sub-drive board 162 may be configured with a board and the CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like and control the operation of the panel movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. Main Games Played by the Gaming Machine Next, the main games played by the Pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute a regular lottery when the fired game balls pass through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation starting condition."

The pachinko gaming machine PY performs a series of games such as variable display of general drawings and auxiliary games based on the general drawing start condition being satisfied, obtaining general drawing related determination information, and performing general drawing lottery. I can do it. The acquired ordinary symbol related determination information includes ordinary symbol random numbers, as shown in FIG. 8(A). The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. When associated with the gaming state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time saving state (time saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number determination values) are appropriately distributed to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Note that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination/Ordinary Figure Variable Display Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Judgment is a determination for determining the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern by using the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination Table as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state), the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state. There is a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) that is used in the state.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. In other words, the pachinko game machine PY is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, when a losing regular symbol (losing regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the regular symbol is determined to be a regular symbol fluctuation pattern in which the regular symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is displayed. Regarding the variable display of common figures in the case of stop display, a common figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern in which the common symbol fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display, a general pattern fluctuation pattern in which the general pattern fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined. It should be noted that these general figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate.

Then, variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time associated with the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is released.

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Pachinko game machine PY controls the auxiliary game using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Note that the specific contents of each element, such as the number of openings and the opening time, can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time such as 0.2 seconds during which it is difficult for the electric chew 12D to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, if the game ball is opened twice for 2.5 seconds with a 1.0 second interval (closed) in between, the first opening time is longer than the first opening time, and the game ball enters the electric chew 12D. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time which is easy to open.

Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time for each auxiliary game is the total time for that auxiliary game, and for example, it may be opened multiple times in one auxiliary game, such as opening once and then opening again after a closing interval. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting hole 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbols 1 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting slot 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably (stopped after being displayed variablely) on the special figure 2 display 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played, and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, in the following, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

The pachinko game machine PY performs a series of games such as a variable display of special symbols and a jackpot game based on the establishment of a starting condition, the acquisition of special symbol related determination information, and the performance of a special symbol lottery. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made regarding the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8(B), the acquired special symbol related determination information includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Next, each determination made using the special figure related determination information will be explained.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment The jackpot judgment is to use a jackpot judgment table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10(A), the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with a gaming state to be described later. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") described later, and a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot determination table for normal probability") used in the high probability state described later. , "high probability jackpot determination table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number determination values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

It should be noted that the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination determines the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 10(B), for example, when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot (content advantageous to the player) consisting of gaming benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table shows the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special symbol 1/special symbol 2), in other words, the winning pattern that is caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that caused the jackpot symbol type determination) is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing a variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing a variable display of special figure 2. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The types of the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 and the jackpot symbol of special symbol 2 can be set as appropriate, but for example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 As such, three types of jackpot symbols are provided: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C, and three types of jackpot symbols are provided as the jackpot symbol of special pattern 2, jackpot symbol D, jackpot symbol E, and jackpot symbol F. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. Note that the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment For reach judgment, for example, when the result of jackpot judgment is a loss, use a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with a gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in the time saving state (time saving reach determination table). judgment table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into the reach determination results "with reach (reach occurs)" and "without reach (reach does not occur)". There is. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is a reach or no reach (whether or not to generate a reach).

As shown in FIG. 10(C), the number of reach random number determination values that are determined as "reach exists (reach occurs)" can be made different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, the result of reach determination, which is performed on the premise that the result of jackpot determination is "lose", is referred to as "reach with reach" (reach occurs), and "no reach" is referred to as "reach with reach (reach occurs)". This is sometimes referred to as ``no reach failure.'' Also, a "loss without reach" is sometimes referred to as a "do-no-lose", and a "lose with a reach" is sometimes referred to as a "lose-to-reach".

3-2-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination is performed using special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables (special symbol fluctuation patterns) as shown in FIGS. The purpose is to determine a variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of variable display of special figures using a determination table (determination table).

The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time, the so-called "shaku", the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later, etc. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can also include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the performance flow (performance content) of the special symbol fluctuation performance. In addition, the type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is based on the type of special symbol (special pattern 1/special pattern 2) that performs variable display that is the target of determination, in other words, the starting opening where the prize was won due to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. It is possible to relate to the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the special figure variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 11) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing this.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpot, one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpots, one for lose with reach, and one for lose without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no reach and loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures 1. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach-less loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 pending number. Specifically, there is a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses that is used for.

Then, the special figure display device 81 displays a variation of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, after the variable display of the special pattern, if the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special pattern variable display (result of the special pattern lottery), the next variable display of the special pattern will not be performed immediately, and the variable display will continue. , a jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with the production flow of the special figure variation production as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, typical effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be explained.

The performances that make up the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle performance.

Normal fluctuation indicates that the performance symbols that had been stopped and displayed have started to fluctuate, and each of the performance symbols that make up each production symbol has been fluctuated and displayed at such high speed that it is difficult to recognize, suggesting that the variable display of the special symbol has started. It is a performance that In addition, the special symbol fluctuation performance (the part from the start of the variation of the production pattern to the stop of variation) related to the no-reach loss variation, and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special symbol variation production where the reach occurs, usually fluctuates. It may consist of

In N reach, immediately after a reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuations, for example, the production symbols that make up the reach are temporarily stopped at the same position for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and the remaining one is This is a performance in which the performance symbols slow down and fluctuate at a slower speed than normal fluctuations. The degree of expectation of a jackpot suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special symbol fluctuation performance ends at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol that fluctuates at that low speed stops. In the case of a loss, the remaining one performance pattern stops at a performance pattern different from the performance pattern that constitutes the reach. If the special symbol fluctuation performance does not end at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol changes again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while maintaining reach.

L reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, L reach is a performance that can be executed after N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than N reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than N reach. Even in L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 described later is With the right effect pattern EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a (at the upper left of the display section 50a), the background image is switched to the L reach exclusive background image (the L reach exclusive video is played). Note that in L reach, 2DCG animation images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As for the content of L Reach, a video of a scene different from a match related to SP Reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as the main character undergoing special training to learn a special move.

SP reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, SP reach is a performance that can be executed after, for example, N reach, and is performed for a longer time than L reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than L reach. Even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later is At the upper left of the display section 50a, with the right effect symbol EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-specific background image (the SP reach-specific video is played). Note that in SP reach, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the content of SP Reach, a video of a match between a team to which the main character belongs and a team to which a rival of the main character belongs is displayed.

The battle performance is, for example, a performance that can be executed after reach in a time-saving state, and is a performance that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in battle production, the achieved reach is maintained, but the production symbols that make up the reach are reduced and moved to predetermined positions (for example, the left production symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right production symbol EZ3 is placed at the upper left of the display section 50a. (upper right corner), the background image will switch to the battle production-specific background image (the battle production-specific video will play). Furthermore, in the battle performance, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance, the performance symbols that constitute the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance are displayed on the display section 50a. This includes not only a state where it is visible from the display section 50a, but also a state where the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or impossible to see from the display section 50a for a predetermined period of time in relation to a dedicated background image. Further, the contents of the normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the effects that make up the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

In addition, as shown in the second column from the right of the table in FIGS. 11 and 12, it is possible to give a name to the special pattern variation pattern by associating it with the jackpot determination result and the content of the special pattern variation production. . The special pattern variation pattern related to a jackpot is sometimes collectively referred to as a "jackpot variation", and the special pattern variation pattern related to a loss is sometimes collectively referred to as a "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special pattern variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special pattern variation pattern in which N reach is performed is special pattern variation. The special pattern variation pattern where the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, loss fluctuations with reach are sometimes referred to as "loss fluctuations with reach", and loss fluctuations without reach are sometimes collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuations".

3-2-5. Pre-reading Judgment Before making a jackpot judgment, the pachinko gaming machine PY can make a pre-reading judgment based on the acquired special figure related judgment information using a pre-reading judgment table as shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, for example. be. The look-ahead determination table is based on the type of starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting winning, in other words, the type of special figure that is variably displayed depending on the starting winning (special drawing 1/special drawing). 2). That is, the pre-reading determination table includes a first pre-reading determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where a prize is won in the first starting opening 11 and a variable display of special drawing 1 is performed, and a first reading determining table (FIG. 13) when a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 and a special drawing is displayed. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) in which variable display of No. 2 is performed. Note that the prefetch determination performed based on the first prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "first prefetch determination," and the prefetch determination performed based on the second prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "second prefetch determination."

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with gaming states (normal gaming state/high probability high base gaming state/low probability high base gaming state) which will be described later. That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state (a lookahead decision table for normal gaming state), and a lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state). There is a look-ahead determination table for the state) and a look-ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state (a look ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state).

In other words, the lookahead determination table includes a first lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state, a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state. A first lookahead determination table used, a second lookahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, a second lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a second lookahead determination table used in the low probability high base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used for.

In addition, by the pre-reading determination using the pre-reading determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special symbol fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special symbol performed by winning the starting openings 11 and 12 is specified. That is, before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning is performed, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the pre-reading determination result. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a pre-read determination result.

The pre-reading determination result including information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the production control board 120 as a pre-read determination result along with its generation. Note that the type of information to be specified as the prefetch determination result can be changed as appropriate. For example, information regarding the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the pre-reading determination result.

As described above, a variable display of the special symbol is performed on the special symbol display 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special symbol variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next special symbol is not variably displayed and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be explained.

3-3. Jackpot Game A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game until the start of the first round game, and a final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

Note that it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Furthermore, hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is also referred to as "one round (1R)," and the tenth round game is also referred to as "10 rounds (10R)."

The pachinko game machine PY then controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate a jackpot game with a type of jackpot symbol. One or more types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the jackpot opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the jackpot opening for each opening, and the time to be closed until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

The pachinko game machine PY can control the jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the type of jackpot game and the jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be explained.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 has elapsed, the big winning hole is activated. The winning hole 14 is closed and the round game ends. Further, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game will be executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game may be executed by a method different from this. You may also do so. For example, if a device is provided in the gaming area 6 that can allocate the prizes to two winning holes, if a winning hole is won in one of the winning holes, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games will be executed, but if a prize is won in the other winning hole, a predetermined winning hole will be executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of a larger number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of a smaller number of round games than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, the game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not being executed. The non-jackpot gaming states include a normal gaming state, which is a basic gaming state, and a specific gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease with which the second starting port 12 can be opened. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

What is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Furthermore, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 that is advantageous to the player means that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. This means that it will take longer.

The specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and a second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. Three types can be set: a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that instead of all of these three types of specific gaming states being installed in the pachinko gaming machine PY, some of the three types of specific gaming states can also be installed.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state and which is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and a state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is referred to as a "normal probability state."

In addition, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state. A state in which the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is called a "time saving state." On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is defined as "non-time saving". "state".

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be explained in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is a state in which it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 than in the non-time-saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier to win a prize in the second starting slot 12 in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state will be described.

For example, by making the time saving state a state in which the normal pattern variation time is likely to be shorter than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize at the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as mentioned above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) is shorter than the normal pattern fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Let it be determined. As a result, in the time saving state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, then the number of regular lottery drawings per unit time is the same. As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In addition, by making the time saving state a state where the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 5.0 seconds in one auxiliary game. Make it open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal pattern fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time will be the same, so once The longer the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game, the longer the electric chew 12D is opened per unit time.

Furthermore, by making the time-saving state a state in which it is easier to determine a win in the winning determination compared to the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-saving state. For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 6600/65536, while in the time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 59936/65536. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the normal figure variation time in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability of a hit being determined is high. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In this way, in the time saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time is likely to be shorter, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer. By satisfying the three conditions, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in the time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot win without greatly reducing the number of game balls in possession compared to the normal gaming state. In other words, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

Note that in the time saving state, all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may not all be met, but only some of the conditions may be met. Finally, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and winning into the second starting port 12 may be facilitated.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special pattern variable display per unit time is small, or special The average figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) in the starting opening are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

In addition, in the following, the first specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability high base gaming state" and the second specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability low "Base gaming state" and the third specific gaming state are also referred to as "low probability high base gaming state." Furthermore, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state."

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base gaming state is controlled as a normal probability state and a time saving state, the high probability low base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a non time saving state, and the high probability high base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a time saving state. It can be said that it is a gaming state in which

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low probability low base gaming state, a low probability high base gaming state, a high probability low base gaming state, a high probability high base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state can also be said to be a gaming state advantageous to the player because the jackpot opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can also be called "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, the high probability high base gaming state and the high probability low base gaming state are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting slot 12 is higher than in the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability, low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the number of prize balls for one winning is greater than the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the current state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the normal game state is first set. Further, the jackpot game state is set by the stop display of jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific gaming state is set by winning a jackpot and executing a jackpot game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be explained.

3-5. Setting a specific gaming state Pachinko gaming machine PY can newly set a specific gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game. That is, after a jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in a specific game state. The duration of this specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, a specific gaming state can be continued until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, it is also possible to limit the period during which a specific gaming state can continue.

When limiting the duration of a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be ended when the termination condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high probability high base gaming state, when the termination condition is satisfied, a low probability high base gaming state or a high probability low base gaming state may be set. In this case, the newly set low probability high base gaming state or high probability low base gaming state may continue until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low probability high base gaming state or the high probability low base gaming state, and when the end condition is met, the normal gaming state may be set.

Furthermore, the termination conditions for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the termination condition, for example, the number of execution times of special figure variable display can be set. In addition, it is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, but also the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls fired after the jackpot game, the number of times the game ball passes through the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the termination condition to be the result of terminating the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Furthermore, these elements may be set as end conditions singly or in combination.

In addition, these ending conditions may be set the same for all specific gaming states that can be set after a jackpot game, or may be set for some specific gaming states among the specific gaming states that can be set. You may do so. Furthermore, the termination conditions may be different for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled based on the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without setting an end condition. Furthermore, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol E ends, the game may be controlled in a low probability high base gaming state. Here, an end condition can be set for this low probability high base game state, and the end condition can be set to 100 times of variable display of special symbols. In addition, the relationship between this jackpot type symbol, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, focusing on the gaming profit of a jackpot, a jackpot in which the game progresses with a high probability after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "high probability jackpot." Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and in a time saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot."

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 16 to 32.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, the special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates a standby state in which special figure variable display is not performed. A customer waiting performance is performed when a customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, when the first performance button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to the effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display section 50a, and frequency settings for the effects to be performed. Note that setting items related to presentation can be set as appropriate. Further, it is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed from the customer waiting demonstration video G100 by the player's operation.

The normal production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability low base gaming state" and indicates the normal gaming state. Further, a plurality of lower performance modes belonging to the normal performance mode can be provided. For example, a first normal presentation mode, a second normal presentation mode, a third normal presentation mode, etc. can be provided as presentation modes at a lower level belonging to the normal presentation mode.

In addition, below, the production mode of the lower hierarchy which belongs to production mode is also called "production stage." Accordingly, the first normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "first normal presentation stage," the second normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "second normal presentation stage," and the third normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "third normal presentation stage." say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically the production mode that is set when the special figure variation display starts for the first time after the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on is the first normal production stage ( (first normal performance mode). However, the type of production mode that is initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

In this way, when a plurality of performance stages belonging to the normal performance mode are provided, the performance stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set to a predetermined number of special symbol variable effects being performed without winning the jackpot. Further, as a switching condition, it can be set that a specific effect, such as a special symbol variation effect based on SP reach/loss variation, is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in special figure fluctuation effects, but the special figure variation effect is the entire section of the special figure variation effect when a reach does not occur, and a reach is established when a reach occurs. It can be divided into the first stage before the reach occurs, and the second stage after the reach is established in the case where a reach occurs. Note that the first part consists of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

In the first stage of the first normal presentation stage, a background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing a city view is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the second normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the field of a baseball field (FIG. 17(B): second normal background image G112) is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the third normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the inside of the restaurant (FIG. 17(C): third normal background image G113) is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first to third normal performance stages, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed. A special background image will be displayed depending on the type of reach.

Note that the dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a common background image in the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

Further, the normal performance mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal performance mode may be a performance mode indicating a non-time saving state. Alternatively, a predetermined performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal performance mode may be provided. Further, a predetermined performance mode different from the normal performance mode may be set in a low probability low base game state and a high probability low base game state that occur under certain conditions.

The variable probability production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "high probability high base gaming state" and indicates the high probability high base gaming state. In the first stage of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the variable probability performance mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability performance mode is displayed.

The time-saving production mode can be set in the "low-probability, high-base gaming state" or "high-probability, high-base gaming state," and is either the low-probability, high-base gaming state or the high-probability, high-base gaming state; This is a production mode that indicates the state. In the first stage of the time-saving production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(E), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and time-saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the time-saving production mode, a dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach in the time-saving production mode.

In addition, the time-saving performance mode can be set only in the low probability high base gaming state, and can also be set as a performance mode indicating the low probability high base gaming state.

In addition, for either or both of the fixed variable production mode and the time-saving production mode, in the same way as the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is met, the production stage is switched. You can also do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(A), an opening image G1 that suggests the start of a jackpot game or a right-hand hit image G2 that encourages "right-hand hitting" is displayed on the display section 50a. A jackpot opening performance will be held where the will be displayed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

In addition, in the jackpot production mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(B), the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display section 50a, and the round image indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the display section 50a. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of paid out prize balls are displayed. In addition, during a round game, as a round effect, a background image (round background) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a as a background of the right-handed hit image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4. Image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display section 50a displays an ending image G5 that suggests the production mode to be set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls that have been paid out. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize ball count image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball count image G6. be done.

In addition, hereinafter, the jackpot opening performance, the round performance, and the jackpot ending performance are collectively referred to as the "jackpot game performance" as the performance executed in the jackpot game. That is, a jackpot game performance is performed in the jackpot performance mode.

4-2. Special figure variation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result).

In the special symbol variation performance, a variation display of performance symbols is performed on the display unit 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the fluctuating display of performance symbols, the performance symbols change and then stop. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, basically, the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the performance symbols.

It should be noted that in the special symbol variation performance performed on the display section 50a, it is also possible to use images other than the variation display of production symbols. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display section 50a, a special feature using various presentation devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board moving device 55, a first presentation button device 40, and a second presentation button device 41 is used. It is possible to perform figure fluctuation effects.

Next, the effect patterns displayed on the display section 50a in the special figure variable effect executed in response to the special figure variable display will be explained. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and multiple types are provided. Specifically, one of the constituent elements of the effect pattern constitutes identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), the effect patterns can be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect patterns can be provided. Then, a performance pattern including the number "1" is defined as a performance pattern G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For convenience, when the individual performance symbols are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "performance symbol G10."

In addition, the numerical parts of the production patterns G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The numerical parts of the production patterns G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, colors are included in the constituent elements of the effect pattern G10. Note that the configuration of the performance symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the production pattern G10.

Next, the effect pattern display area for displaying the effect pattern G10 will be explained. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the display section 50a is divided into three parts approximately equally in the horizontal direction, and the left, center, and right sides are divided into a left presentation pattern area 50b1, a middle presentation pattern area 50b2, and a right presentation pattern. This can be the area 50b3. The performance pattern G10 is displayed in any of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, and the right performance pattern area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first part of the special symbol variation performance, the performance pattern G10 displayed in the left performance pattern area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1", and the performance pattern G10 displayed in the middle performance pattern area 50b2 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1". They are collectively referred to as "middle performance symbols EZ2," and the performance symbols G10 displayed in the right performance symbol area 50b3 are collectively referred to as "right performance symbols EZ3." That is, in the left performance pattern area 50b1, middle performance pattern area 50b2, and right performance pattern area 50b3, the performance pattern G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in common, but the performance pattern G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is written as a left performance pattern EZ1, a middle performance pattern EZ2, and a right performance pattern EZ3.

In addition, as described later, in the special pattern variation performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, but ultimately the special symbol lottery results (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type, reach determination result) are shown. The stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in this manner. When announcing a jackpot as a result of the special drawing lottery, performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed so that three performance symbols G10 of the same number are lined up side by side (so-called "Zero"). Therefore, hereinafter, the effect pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that are stopped and displayed when notifying a jackpot will be referred to as a "jackpot effect pattern." For example, if the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed as "7, 7, 7," the jackpot design will be "performance symbol G10g," and if they are statically displayed as "9, 9, 9," the jackpot design will be " The production pattern is G10i. Furthermore, the jackpot effect symbols may be abbreviated by numbers included in the effect symbols. For example, if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10g", the jackpot effect pattern will be "7", and if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10i", the jackpot effect pattern will be "9". Furthermore, as will be described later, in the special symbol variation performance, the special symbol lottery result is completely displayed when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed. However, basically, in the middle of the special symbol variation performance, before the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). This is because the contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped and displayed may be changed. For example, after the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a jackpot (relatively disadvantageous to the player), they are changed to a mode indicating another jackpot (relatively advantageous to the player). may be done. Therefore, when the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner that first indicates a jackpot (before they are changed), the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers that constitute the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3. It is also referred to as a ``jackpot effect pattern''.

In addition, in the special pattern variation production, the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 are the production symbol G10 with the same number. Reach may be temporarily stopped (temporary stop display). As will be described later, reach is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state, and by reaching reach, the chance of winning a jackpot has increased. Therefore, the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 related to the reach is referred to as a "reach performance pattern". For example, when the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “1”, the reach production symbol becomes “production symbol G10a”, and when they temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “3” , the reach effect pattern becomes “effect pattern G10c”. Furthermore, the reach effect design may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect pattern. For example, if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10a", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "1", and if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10c", the ready-to-reach performance symbol is abbreviated as "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in which small patterns are variably displayed in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end of the display section 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, small symbols can be variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. Although the design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, for example, the number part of the performance symbol G10 may be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed lines, but these are the left presentation pattern area 50b1, These are described to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, right effect symbol area 50b3, and small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

Furthermore, as described above, the performances that constitute the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance. Some of these will now be explained.

4-2-1. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of first performing normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal fluctuations will be specifically explained. As small symbols, a left small symbol KZ1, a medium small symbol KZ2, and a right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left performance symbol EZ1, middle performance symbol EZ2, and right performance symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), on the display section 50a, the left effect pattern EZ1, the medium effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small pattern KZ1, the medium small pattern KZ2, and the right small pattern When the variable display of the special pattern starts from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the variable display of the special pattern is started, the variable display of the special pattern starts as shown in FIG. 20(B) As shown in the figure, the special figure variation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 can be made different. For example, the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling each production symbol EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling each of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a. It is also possible to change the positions one after another at a fixed position. Note that the display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be the same.

In addition, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are being displayed in a high-speed variable manner, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images on the background side thereof, such as background images G111 to G114. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of this special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with no reach and no loss (for example, normal loss variation), the variable display of the special pattern ends (special pattern (stop display), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the loss eyes (so-called "rose eyes") that are unique to no-reach losses.

Towards the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 20(D), the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. Temporarily stops (temporary stop) at the center position.

Finally, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in a horizontally lined state at approximately the vertical center position, are completely stopped all at once as shown in FIG. 20(F). , and the stop is confirmed (the stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), come to a complete stop, that is, when the final stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to EZ3 KZ3 stops all at once at the same random number as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

Note that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stop means that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move greatly as in a scroll display, but slightly shake or make small reciprocating motions on the spot. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, but this provisional stop display and A definitive stop display is sometimes referred to as a "stop display" in a broad sense. In addition, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the performance symbols are stopped in the order of left performance symbol EZ1 → right performance symbol EZ3 → middle performance symbol EZ2, but the order of stopping ( The method) is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, we will explain how reach is established. Even if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), basically the same as the case without reach described above, on the display section 50a, As shown in FIG. 21(A), the variable display of the special symbols starts from a state where the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed, As shown in FIG. 21(B), the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and at the same time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. As shown in 21(D), the right effect symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and a reach is established. When a reach is achieved, an image G11 indicating that a reach is achieved (a reach suggesting image) is displayed. Incidentally, even if the reach is achieved with the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 continues to be performed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the reach is established, the production symbols are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in the order of left production symbol EZ1 → right production symbol EZ3, but the order (method) of temporary stopping is as follows. It is not limited to , and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, the numbers of the production symbols that constitute the reach are not limited to "5" either. Further, the position where the vehicle is temporarily stopped (temporary stop) is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols forming the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be in other directions such as a diagonal direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special symbol variation performance when there is no reach and a loss, and the section from the start of the special symbol variation performance when the reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be made into normal variation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform various preview performances such as a so-called "pseudo series", a cut-in preview, and a dialogue preview until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is also possible to enter the so-called "zone" before the reach is established.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established after a normal fluctuation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win. Next, N reach will be specifically explained.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point on. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 22(A), the state when reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the medium effect pattern EZ2, which is fluctuatingly displayed (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually slows down.

If the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), from the state where reach is established, the middle production pattern EZ2 will temporarily be at approximately the center position in the vertical direction. The game stops (temporarily stops), and a stop display of the production pattern indicating a loss is performed. At this time, reach has been established, so as shown in Figure 22 (C-1), a medium effect symbol consisting of a number ("4" in Figure 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers that constitute the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, as shown in FIG. The left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporary stop) completely stop at a loss that is unique to a loss with a reach, that is, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, 3 The three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 stop all at once at the same loss points as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are unique to a reach loss, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. Note that the contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

If the special symbol variation performance does not end at N reach, as shown in Figure 22 (C-2), the remaining one medium performance symbol EZ2 that has not stopped will fluctuate at high speed again, and N while the reach is maintained. It may develop (switch) from reach to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. L Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY can perform L Reach after N Reach. The L reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in the case of L reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Moreover, at the start of L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(A), a background image exclusively for L reach (background image for L reach G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the L reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the content is such that the main character confesses his feelings to a girl.

When the L reach background image G114 is displayed, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a meeting place, as shown in FIG. 23(A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23(B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, a production symbol with the number "5" that constitutes the reach and a production symbol with the number "4" that does not constitute the reach appear as the medium production symbol EZ2. It rotates slowly, coming out from the back side to the front side, and then returning to the back side.

While the rotation of the number "4" production symbol and the number "5" production symbol continues, Thule related to the L reach background image G114 progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), a scene appears in which the main character confesses his feelings to the girl. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, the effect pattern with the number "5" that makes up the reach and the effect pattern with the number "4" that does not make up the reach seem to mutually repel the opponent. collide with each other. The number "5" production symbol constitutes a reach, and the number "4" production symbol does not constitute a reach, so the number "4" production symbol is blown away and the number "5" production symbol is If it remains, the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established in a manner that indicates a jackpot, while if the production symbol with the number "5" is blown away and the production symbol with the number "4" remains, the production is in a manner that indicates a loss in reach. The stop display of symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene in FIG. 23(C) is the final phase of the L reach, and a performance suggesting a jackpot (jackpot suggestion performance) is executed or a performance suggesting a loss (loss suggestion performance) is executed. This constitutes a branching point (a so-called "win/lose branching point").

At the winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), a smiling girl will appear close-up on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1). After this is displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-1), the main character who is happy after successfully confessing is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. displayed in the following manner. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character happy after successfully confessing and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion production. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the figure is displayed in the L reach background image G114. As shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), a close-up of a girl with a sad expression is displayed on the display section 50a, and then, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), she is disappointed because she failed to confess. The main character is displayed. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. is displayed. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the reach is out of reach.

The display of the main character being disappointed after failing to confess constitutes a presentation that suggests failure. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing position for reach.

4-2-5. SP Reach Also, the pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the L reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Furthermore, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), a background image exclusively for SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the SP reach background image G115 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the story consists of a confrontation between the main character and an enemy character who is a rival of the main character. ing. Note that the main character is a baseball pitcher, the enemy character is a baseball batter, and the two face off in the positions of a pitcher and a batter in a baseball game.

When the SP reach background image G115 is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 25(A), and then an enemy character appears in the center of the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 25(B). An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the main character throws a ball, and as shown in FIG. 26(B), the ball advances toward the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and a scene is reached in which the confrontation between the protagonist character and the enemy character is about to come to an end. This scene constitutes a turning point (win-lose turning point) in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, where the main character wins, suggesting a jackpot, or loses, suggesting a loss.

After this winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the battle, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), the main character strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character shouting after winning the battle and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion performance. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a reach loss variation (SP loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the SP reach background image G115 is displayed as shown in FIG. 27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the match, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a reach loss.

The display of the main character being disappointed after losing the battle constitutes a presentation suggesting a loss. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing eye for reach.

Next, the movable object performance and operation performance performed in the special figure variation performance will be explained. The movable body performance and operation performance may be performed as part of the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, N reach, or jackpot game performance, etc., or may be performed independently of these performances. Sometimes it is done. First, I will explain the moving object performance.

4-3. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a movable body performance that involves the movement of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure variation performance or a jackpot game performance. The movable object performance is a performance using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable object effect functions as an effect that suggests the development to SP reach, as shown in Fig. 28 (A), when developing from N reach to SP reach in the special figure variation effect, first As shown in (B), the plate movable device 55 is activated, and the plate movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position when viewed from the front, and is held at that position for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(C), the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board moving device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. Note that the operation details of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation Performance Next, the operation performance will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY performs an operation promotion performance at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure fluctuation performance or a jackpot game performance, and an operation result performance according to the operation of the first performance button 40k, the second performance button 41k, etc. It is possible to perform operations including. The operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance, and each is a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. It functions as a performance.

For example, as mentioned above, when a winning or losing point is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period (operation valid period) occurs during which the pressing operation of the first production button 40k is valid, and along with the occurrence of this operation valid period, , as shown in FIG. 29(A), a performance (operation promotion performance) that prompts the user to operate the first performance button 40k is performed.

In the operation promotion performance, a first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first performance button 40k to be operated, and an image (pressing An image (operation image) G12b representing the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c.

Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that FIG. 29(B) shows a state in which the operation valid period has occurred and 1/3 of the operation valid time has elapsed.

Then, when the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), after the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, or after the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, After the remaining time of the valid operation period runs out without 40k being operated, the operation result presentation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 29(C), for example, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the operation result is that the panel movable device 55 is operated, the panel movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, is held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is lowered. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable object presentation. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 accompanying the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the movable board 55k is raised, thereby ending the operation result presentation. When the operation result presentation is completed, a jackpot suggestion presentation is performed.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is reach loss variation (SP loss variation), even if the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, or the first production button 40k is pressed. Even if the remaining time of the performance button operation validity period runs out without being executed, the operation result performance is not performed and the loss suggesting performance is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board moving device 55 or the display of the effect image G13, but can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special symbol variation performance, but can also be executed in the jackpot performance.

4-5. Pre-reading effect Next, a pre-reading effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display subject to special figure reservation is executed will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing a look-ahead effect for the special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold for which no jackpot judgment has been made, based on the result of the look-ahead judgment, at any timing of the special figure fluctuation effect. . The pre-read performance is a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation, and functions as a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reservation. As an example of a look-ahead performance, there is a reservation change notice using a reservation performance that represents special map reservation. Here, the pending performance and pending change notice performed in the normal performance mode will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 30(A), the hold effect is performed in a hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a section in the substantially center of the lower end of the display section 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially equally in the left and right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the first variable display of special figure 1 is displayed based on the special figure 1 related random number that occurs first among the reserved special figure 1 reserves and corresponds to the special figure 1 reserve. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to fourth area 50d4, the second to fourth reserved special figure 1 reservations are generated based on the special figure 1 related random numbers corresponding to the special figure 1 reservations. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold, in which special figure 1 variable display is performed, is displayed second to fourth.

In addition, below, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in 1st area|region 50d1 is called "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1." Similarly, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icons displayed in the second area 50d2, third area 50d3, and fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 2" and "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 3." "Special figure 1 reservation" and "Special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, the existing special drawing 1 reservations are referred to as "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order in which they occur.

Moreover, the display area 50e is formed to the left of the hold display area 50d. In the display area 50e, the icon representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the object indicated by the icon displayed in the display area 50e is different from the object indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, the "hold effect" corresponding to special drawing 1 hold is Although not included, since the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are related, hereinafter, the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon will be collectively referred to as "hold effect". Further, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon." Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation display being executed that the icon indicates is also referred to as "the variation".

In addition, in FIG. 30(A), the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e are clearly indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are clearly shown by broken lines; This is written to represent the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be explained. In the following explanation, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variable display is in progress (the special figure variable effect is in progress) and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this situation, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the aforementioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold (order of hold) A reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2) is displayed, and in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown), a reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2 A hold icon HA3 representing special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the aforementioned display area 50e (not shown), the icon HA1 representing the currently executed special figure 1 variable display is displayed. Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30(B) is the normal mode.

In this manner, in the hold performance, special drawings 1 are displayed in order of occurrence from the left end to the right of the hold display area 50d. That is, the variable display of reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed with a reservation icon. Ru.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Continuously, when variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown). to the first area 50d1. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are each shifted one by one to the left. This means that the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold that the hold icon HA3 represents is the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation in response to the special figure variable display being started next.

Further, the pending icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, so it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the display area 50e. That is, the word "icon" is prefixed to "pending" for the icon displayed in the pending display area 50d, and "relevant" for the icon displayed in the display area 50e. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed, if the start condition for the special symbol fluctuation display is satisfied for the special symbol reservation indicated by the hold icon, the special symbol fluctuation display related to the establishment of the start condition is A corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

In addition, when changing from a hold icon to the relevant icon, in other words, when moving the icon from the hold display area 50d to the relevant display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged approximately twice when moving from the reserved display area 50d to the display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and a special drawing 1 reservation occurs, a new reservation is made according to the occurrence of the special symbol 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 30(E). Icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when a prize is won in the first starting slot 11 and a special drawing 1 related random number is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon will disappear when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, it will remain in the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (on hold and in progress). Depending on the icon, the icon exists under different names (pending icon and the icon).

By the way, as mentioned above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko game machine PY can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on this validity information and special symbol variation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called a "hold notice."

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when a pending notice is given, the player can expect that he may win a jackpot with the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon. Next, a specific example of the suspension notice will be explained. As a specific example of the suspension notice, assume that the display mode of the suspension icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) becomes a special mode.

One type of reservation notice is a reservation notice that enters a special mode immediately after the reservation icon is displayed, in other words, a reservation notice is given when special drawing 1 reservation occurs (at the time of winning at the first starting gate 11). There are types. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). In addition, in the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, even if you try to make it completely stationary, the display position does not move, but the It may also be configured so that it sways slightly in the field.

Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (the hold notice is given). In the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment after being displayed, but it may be displayed in a special mode and the period during which it is displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of reservation notice, there is a reservation notice type in which the reservation icon takes a special mode when it moves, in other words, a reservation icon change notice is given when the special figure 1 reservation is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) moves to the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation effect) is started based on the special symbol 1 reservation represented by the reservation icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 32(D), the special symbol is displayed in the first area 50d1. The hold icon HA3 that was displayed moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 that was displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, its display mode changes from a normal mode to a special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (a notice of hold is given) .

Furthermore, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the reservation notice, so that the degree of jackpot expectation can be made different depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is the normal mode, and green, red, and gold are the special modes. The jackpot expectation level indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white < green < red < gold.

In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the pre-read effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, but includes images other than the hold icon HA on the display section 50a such as a background image, sound output from the speaker 52, light emission from the frame lamp 53, and board movement. It is possible to perform the operation using a presentation device other than the image display device 50, such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as a production mode of the look-ahead production, in addition to a production mode that continues without interruption from the execution until the special symbol change display starts, such as a pending icon change notice by the pending icon HA, there is also a stoppage of the production pattern. It is also possible to use a performance mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time a display is performed or a variable display of performance symbols is started.

5. Game control by game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained based on FIGS. 33 to 42. Note that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

Further, counters, timers, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101, which will be explained below, are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko game machine PY is powered on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the game control board 100 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, a power-on process (S001) is performed. The power-on processing includes permission settings for access to the gaming RAM 104, settings for the gaming CPU 102, SIO (System Input/Output), PIO (Parallel Input/Output), and CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit: interrupt time management). settings etc. of the circuit for

Following the power-on processing, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers related to the regular symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information are updated by adding one. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a portion of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) ends and until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) starts, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) The process of updating counter values of various random numbers is repeatedly executed. In addition, if an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 while interrupts are disabled, the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will not start immediately, but will start after interrupts are enabled (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005), output processing (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands etc. set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the production control board 120, payout control board 170, etc.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and inputs the detection signal from the lower tray full switch to the game as the lower tray full data. The data is stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. 33. That is, the updating process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general figure related determination information and the special figure related determination information is performed during the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt process (S005)). After the end of S005), this is performed both during the period until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started.

Next to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processes (S107) and ends the game control side timer interrupt process (S005). Other processing (S107) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control process is performed to pay out prize balls to the player. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 are set to " A check is made to see if it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal.

Then, the gaming control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the gaming control main processing until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 msec later) ), the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. In the output processing (S101) of the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) executed again, the gaming control microcomputer 101 outputs the data that was set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the previous gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005). Outputs commands etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be explained using FIGS. 35 and 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the general winning hole 10, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the general winning hole sensor 10a (S201). If a game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO in S201), the process advances to step S203, and if a game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered into the game ball. General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("3" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the general winning hole 10 is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process advances to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether the normal operation status (described later) is 1 or not, in other words, whether the normal figure variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process advances to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) is The normal symbol random number indicated by is acquired as the common symbol related determination information (S205), the acquired common symbol related determination information is stored in the common symbol retention storage section 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 12, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process advances to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. Second starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S208). In the second starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls (“2” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the second starting hole 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12.

Next, if the number of special drawings 2 pending (specifically the value of the counter (special drawing 2 holding number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special drawings 2 holding) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more, It is determined whether there is one (S209). If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process advances to step S214, but if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "4" or more (less than "4"), ( NO in S209), the special figure 2 reservation number addition process is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, the special figure 2 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 2 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start winning command is specified by comparing the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second starting winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 11, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. First starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S215). In the first starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("4" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the first starting hole 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 reservations (specifically, the value of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more. It is determined whether or not (S216). If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not greater than (less than) "4" (NO in S216), the process proceeds to step S221. ), the special figure 1 reservation number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, the special figure 1 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 1 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first lookahead determination process, the first start winning command is identified by comparing the current gaming state and the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first lookahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserves in the special figure 1 reserve storage section 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the big winning hole 14, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. If a game ball has not entered the grand prize opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if a gaming ball has entered the grand prize opening 14 (YES in S221), the memory is stored in the gaming RAM 104. It is determined whether the counter value of the provided big winning opening prize counter is "9" or more (S222). The big winning hole prize counter is a counter for counting the number of prizes won in the big winning hole 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the first embodiment, the prescribed number of winning prizes is set to "14". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is ended, and the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is not more than "11", that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning hole prize counter is incremented by 1 (S223), and the big winning hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player (S224). ), the sensor detection process ends. In addition, in the grand winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("9" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the grand winning hole 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the grand winning hole 14.

Note that sensors other than sensors 10a to 14a are provided as sensors capable of detecting game balls, and processes other than those shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed based on the sensor detecting a game ball. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, normal operation processing regarding control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing regarding the general figure display 82 and electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "normal operation status" (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", a normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", a normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", a normal symbol confirmation process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", an auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. Note that the "normal operation status" is initially set to "1".

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 86. Furthermore, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82 for the normal pattern fluctuation time according to the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern. , and change the normal operation status to "2". In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command in accordance with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process that is performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal symbol variation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the common symbol variation time has elapsed since the fluctuating display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether or not to end the fluctuating display of the common symbol), and If it is determined that the figure variation time has elapsed, the normal figure is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process (S1104) is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), it is determined whether a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether to end the stop display of the common symbol). If it is determined that a predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped and displayed regular symbol is a losing symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4" and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the time of starting the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current gaming state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, and the big prize winning device 14D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing regarding the special figure display 81, special figure reservation display 83, and big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", the special symbol fluctuation Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", gaming state setting processing (S1506) is performed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process that is performed during standby when variable display of special symbols and jackpot games are not being performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation process will be detailed later.

The special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol confirmation process will be detailed later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. When the jackpot game ends, the special operation status is changed to "5". Note that when each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and the state where the jackpot game is controlled is the "jackpot game state", and the setting of the special operation status "4" is called "jackpot". It is called "gaming state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game when the jackpot game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high probability state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the termination condition for the high probability state is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, that number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number of times counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when controlling in a time saving state after a jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the remaining time saving number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming status command indicating the gaming status after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the gaming status setting process.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be explained using FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 pending number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no memory of the special figure 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting opening 12, the special figure 2 related judgment information is not stored. It is determined whether the number of 1 reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no memory of the special drawing 1 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the first starting opening 11, It is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , turns on the customer waiting flag (S1620), and ends the special symbol waiting process.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is "0" but the number of special drawings 1 holding is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special drawing 2 related determination information, but the first start If there is one or more stored pieces of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning in the mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special symbol 1 determination process (S1609), the first stored special symbol random number among the special symbol random numbers stored in the special symbol 1 pending storage unit 105a is read out, and the special symbol random number is read out based on the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state. Then, a judgment is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a loss (jackpot judgment).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (jackpot symbol type determination). Then, jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in a special symbol buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and a symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "loss", loss symbol data representing a loss is set in the special pattern buffer, and a symbol designation command representing a loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be explained using FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (S1652) and proceed to step S1654; if it is not in a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), the time-saving After selecting the state special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1653), the process advances to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the jackpot determination result is a "jackpot". If it is not a jackpot (NO in S1654), the process advances to step S1655, and if it is a jackpot (YES in S1654), a jackpot symbol is selected from the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process advances to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, a reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is compared with a reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is a reach or no reach.

The game control microcomputer 101 next determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). After that, the process advances to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of reserved special symbols 1 is checked, and the result is selected in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss according to the number of reserved special figures 1 (S1657), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special pattern variation pattern random number, and compares the special pattern variation pattern random number with the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659. Determine the special figure 1 variation pattern The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and starts the special figure 1 variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Note that the special operation timer is updated by 4ms in other processing in the game control side timer interrupt processing. In addition, the set special figure 1 variation start command includes information regarding the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and information about the special figure variation pattern judgment performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). Contains information about the results (information on special pattern fluctuation patterns, including information on whether there is a reach or not and special symbol fluctuation time).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special pattern 1 display 81a to start displaying the special pattern 1 in a variable manner based on the special pattern variation time corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a Special figure 1 reservation storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the first reservation (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1612). In this way, the special drawing 1 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reservation number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special operation status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns the customer waiting flag OFF (S1617), and performs special symbol waiting processing. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process ends without executing step S1617.

In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, there is one or more stored special drawings 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting port 12. If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 judgment process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment process (S1603) are basically the same processing contents as the special figure 1 judgment process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). .

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically the same except that the table used for jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used for jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since this is the same process as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the explanation will be omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1603), except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Since this process is similar to S1610), the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b to Special figure 2 pending storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the fourth pending item (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1605). In this way, the special drawing 2 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special map 2 reservation number counter (S1606), and changes the special map 2 reservation number indicated by the special map 2 reservation display 83b by decreasing it by "1" (S1607). ), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process advances to step S1616.

In the basic embodiment as described above, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 reservation is performed only when the special symbol 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation. In the basic embodiment, it is easier for the player to win a jackpot symbol with a large profit in the lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation than in the lottery based on the special symbol 1 reservation. In addition, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation. Moreover, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 hold and the extinguishment of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs, regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be explained using FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1701). If you do not want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (NO in S1701), you can end the special symbol fluctuating process, and if you want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (YES in S1701), you can display the fluctuating special symbols on the special symbol display 81. At the same time, special symbols are stopped and displayed according to the symbol data (jackpot symbol data or loss special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 (S1702).

Next, a preset special symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special symbol variation stop command indicating the end of the variation display of the special symbol is output to the buffer. (S1704), changes the special operation status to "3" (S1705), and ends the special symbol variation process.

[Special design confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be explained using FIG. 42. In the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol confirmation time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1751). If you do not want to end the special symbol stop display (NO in S1751), if you end the special symbol confirmation process and end the special symbol stop display (YES in S1751), you are currently in a normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF). It is determined whether or not (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time-saving state (NO in S1753), the process advances to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time-saving state (YES in S1753), it displays the remaining variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving state. The value of the remaining time saving number counter that measures the number of times (remaining number of time saving) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining time saving number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process advances to step S1757, and if the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0" (in S1755) YES), the time-saving state is shifted to a non-time-saving state (the time-saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), change the special operation status to "1" (S1762), finish the special symbol confirmation process, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), reset the gaming state ( A normal gaming state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number of times counter and time saving remaining number of times counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol confirmation process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Set the time from the time the game is played until the start of one round) to the special operation timer. Furthermore, in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol, an opening command indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of effects by the effect control board 120 will be explained using the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 43 to 47. Note that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the control of effects by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the production control main process, first, a power-on process corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. Note that the random numbers for performance determination include various random numbers for determining performance content, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special symbol variation performance pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for judgment regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the game control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation performance start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a (performs various effects using the image) according to the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the production control board 120 outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various performances using audio), and controls the sub-drive board. 162 to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light (to perform various effects by emitting light), and to operate the board movable body 55k (to perform various effects by movement). The various performances include a special figure variation performance, a jackpot game performance (jackpot opening performance, round performance, jackpot ending performance), customer waiting performance, operation performance, and pre-reading performance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) and the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100, is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 44. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1ms period is input to the production control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the production control microcomputer 121 creates first production button switch data based on the detection signal from the first production button sensor 40a. The performance control microcomputer 121 creates second performance button switch data based on the detection signal from the second performance button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 uses the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the image effect, etc. is output to the sub-drive board 162. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs timer update processing (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the performance RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control time related to various predetermined performances. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the production control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing to reset the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt process will be explained using FIG. 45. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10msec is input to the production control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first performs a received command analysis process that analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be explained in detail in the basic embodiment described below.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs audio control processing (S4202). In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161 based on the performance content indicated by the special figure variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124. is output.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the performance contents indicated by the special symbol variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124, and the like.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be explained using FIGS. 46 and 47. In the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not it has received a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) from the gaming control board 100, in other words, it has received a start winning command. It is determined whether the data has been stored in the buffer (S4301). If the performance control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), it proceeds to step S4302, whereas if it has not received the start winning command (NO in S4301), it proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a starting winning process in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. In the starting winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command pending storage section 125 in the performance RAM 124. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored starting winning command and determines whether or not to execute a pre-read performance that indicates the expected level of jackpot. In addition to a pending notice in which a pending icon is displayed in a special manner, the pre-reading effect includes a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these pre-read effects, a pre-read effect start command for executing the decided effects is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out and a pre-read effect using the image is performed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50. In addition, while the image control board 140 is performing a prefetch effect using images, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls audio according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140. Sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (executing a pre-reading effect using audio), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (performing a pre-reading effect using light emission). It is possible to operate 55k (execute a pre-read effect by operation).

In step S4303, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if it has received the symbol designation command (YES in S4303), the production control microcomputer 121 transfers the symbol designation command to the production RAM 124. The symbol designation command is stored in the symbol designation command storage section 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure variation start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process advances to step S4307, while if the special figure variation start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure variation production are determined. , performs a special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect.

In the special figure variation production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage section 127 in the production RAM 124. Next, based on the contents of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, losing special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command, the production symbol EZ1 is stopped and displayed. -EZ3, and a stop symbol pattern determination table for performing a stop symbol determination for determining small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special symbols and special symbol variation patterns. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special symbol and the special symbol variation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, the values of random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs a stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for stop symbol pattern determination with the selected stop symbol pattern table and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a no-reach variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to result in a so-called "missing pattern". In addition, if the special symbol variation pattern is a reach/loss variation, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to The KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected to form a so-called "Zero" according to the production mode and the type of jackpot symbol. .

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 generates a special figure fluctuation performance pattern in which the performance contents of the special figure fluctuation performance are associated, based on the performance mode in which it is staying and the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. Select a special figure variation performance pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation performance pattern to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation performance pattern determination tables are provided in association with production modes and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special symbol variation production pattern determination table that is associated with the special symbol variation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment table, the value of the random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation performance pattern Judgment values) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination as a random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination, and selects a special figure based on the acquired random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination. Performs fluctuation performance pattern judgment.

The performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for determining the special pattern variation performance pattern with the selected special pattern variation performance pattern table in the special pattern variation performance pattern determination, determines the special pattern variation performance pattern, and determines the special pattern variation performance pattern. At the same time, the data representing the special figure fluctuation performance pattern (special figure fluctuation performance pattern data) representing the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a special figure fluctuation performance start command indicating the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. set.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes a predetermined command from the image ROM 142. The special figure variation effect is performed using the image on the display section 50a of the image display device 50.

Further, the special figure variation performance start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. In addition, the special figure variation effect start command includes, in addition to the special figure variation effect using the images performed on the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect using the sound output from the speaker 52, and the special figure variation effect using the light emitted from the frame lamp 53. It includes the performance content of the figure fluctuation performance and the performance content of the special figure fluctuation performance based on the operation performed by the board movable body 55k.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special symbol variation production content indicated by the special symbol variation production start command sent to the image control board 140 while the special symbol variation production using images is being performed by the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs audio via the audio control circuit 161 (executes the special figure variation effect using audio), and causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (executes the special figure variation effect by emitting light). (performs a variable effect), and operates the board movable body 55k (executes a special figure variable effect by operation).

In step S4307, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special symbol fluctuation stops. A special symbol variation performance end process (S4308) is performed to end the performance (stop the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and perform a stop display).

In the special pattern fluctuation performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special pattern fluctuation stop command, and ends the special pattern fluctuation performance appropriately based on the analysis result (performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and small pattern KZ1). A special figure variation effect end command for stopping the variable display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the special symbol variation production end command, it ends the special symbol variation production that is being executed (stops the variation production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

In step S4309, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the gaming state command (NO in S4309), it proceeds to step S4311, whereas if it has received the gaming state command (YES in S4309), it analyzes the gaming state command. , identifies the gaming state represented by the gaming state command, and performs a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state (S4310).

The production control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 in the gaming state setting process. For example, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "00H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is the normal gaming state. Further, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "01H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a high probability high base gaming state. Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag "02H" in the gaming state flag area of the performance RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a low probability high base gaming state.

In step S4311, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if it has received the customer waiting command (YES in S4311), it performs customer waiting performance standby processing. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting performance standby process, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the waiting time (customer waiting performance waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the performance pattern to the start of the customer waiting performance. Set it on the timer. Note that the performance control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has elapsed, and if it determines that the waiting time has elapsed, it sends a customer waiting performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the customer waiting performance. set in the output buffer of

In step S4313, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315, whereas if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the production control microcomputer 121 executes the jackpot with the start of the opening of the jackpot game. Opening performance start processing is performed (S4314).

In the jackpot opening production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command, and based on the analysis result, determines whether to execute the jackpot opening production according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on. If it is to be executed, select the performance content (jackpot opening performance pattern) of the jackpot opening performance, and output a jackpot opening performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the jackpot opening performance with the selected jackpot opening performance pattern. Set in buffer.

In step S4315, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether the number of rounds designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the number of rounds designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the number of rounds designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the number of rounds designation command has been received (YES in S4315), round production start processing is performed in conjunction with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round performance start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the number of rounds designation command, determines whether or not to execute a round production according to the round game to be started from now on, and if it is to be executed, executes the round production. The performance content (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In step S4317, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process is finished, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending performance start process ( After performing S4318) and production mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

In the jackpot ending production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending production according to the ending of the jackpot game that will be executed from now on. The performance content (jackpot ending performance pattern) of the jackpot ending performance is selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a process of setting the performance mode after the jackpot game (setting the performance mode) based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command, in the performance mode setting process. control processing).

For example, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the production control microcomputer 121 sets it to a probability variable production mode that suggests a high probability high base gaming state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the variable performance mode start command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , displays the background image G120 for probability variation as a background image, and outputs the BGM for probability variation as BGM.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, or jackpot symbol E, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects either a high probability high base gaming state or a low probability high base gaming state. Set a time-saving production mode in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the performance mode flag indicating the time-saving performance mode in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and sends a time-saving performance mode start command indicating that the time-saving performance mode is set to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Set to . When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , the time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described as the first embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 10,000) of game balls, which are game media, are sealed inside and circulated inside without being discharged to the outside. It consists of an enclosed game machine in which the game balls cannot be touched. In the pachinko game machine PY1, regardless of whether you enter (pass through) the various winning openings 10, 11, 12, and 14 that allow you to win game balls as prize balls, or whether you pass through the out opening 19 without winning, The game balls that are fired, enter the game area 6, and flow down inside the game area 6 are collected, and by firing the collected game balls again, a game is played by using the internal game balls cyclically. .

In addition, in the following, a game ball that enters the various winning openings 10, 11, 12, and 14 and is ejected to the outside of the gaming area 6 (passes through) is referred to as a "safe ball", and a ball that does not win a prize is referred to as a "safe ball". A game ball that passes through the out port 19 and is ejected to the outside of the game area 6 is sometimes referred to as an "out ball." Furthermore, the safe ball and the out ball are sometimes collectively referred to as the "ejected ball."

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the game ball is set (supplied) at a predetermined firing position and then fired toward the game area 6 by the firing device 72. It may not reach the target and return to the predetermined firing position. In this case, the game ball returning toward the predetermined firing position does not return to the predetermined firing position as it is, but is collected as a foul ball from a predetermined foul ball collection port formed in the firing area 7. In the pachinko game machine PY1, the foul balls are collected and fired again like the sale balls and out balls (ejected balls). That is, the safe balls, out balls, and foul balls constitute game balls that are used cyclically within the pachinko game machine PY1.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, all game balls enclosed in the pachinko game machine PY1 are made of stainless steel and do not stick to magnets. These stainless steel game balls contain less iron than conventional steel game balls that stick to magnets. This is to prevent fraud in which the game ball is guided by a magnet from outside the transparent plate 23t.

FIG. 48 is a front view schematically showing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. As shown in FIG. 48, a card unit CU is installed on the left side of the pachinko game machine PY1. The front of the card unit CU is provided with a card insertion slot CUa1 into which an IC card serving as a recording medium can be inserted and taken out, and a banknote insertion slot CUa2 into which banknotes can be inserted. The card unit CU reads and rewrites valuable information such as the credit balance and the number of balls held by the IC card from the IC card inserted into the card insertion slot CUa1, and interacts with the pachinko gaming machine PY1. It is possible to communicate with

Furthermore, since the pachinko game machine PY1 is configured as an enclosed game machine, the structure of the front door 23 is significantly different from that of the basic embodiment.

At the lower front end of the front door 23, a unit display device 300 is arranged that allows an operation to start a game. The unit display device 300 consists of a touch panel with a liquid crystal display, and displays a button (rent button) for renting game balls (not shown) and a button (return button) for returning game balls (not shown).

Note that the unit display device 300 is electrically connected to the card unit CU. When a lending button or a return button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the card unit CU transmits to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 a command to lend a game ball or to return a game ball.

Furthermore, a protruding base 34 that protrudes forward is provided directly above the unit display device 300 on the front door 23. Since the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is an enclosed gaming machine, the protruding base 34 is not opened like the upper tray 34 of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment, but is sealed, and the It has a structure that prevents it from coming into contact with the game ball. In addition, on the front of the protruding base 34, a number-of-balls display device 301, which will be described later, is arranged to display the number of balls held, and on the top surface of the protruding base 34, there is a display device 301 that can be pressed down as in the basic embodiment. A first performance button 40k is arranged.

Note that the second performance button 41k (second performance button device 41) that was installed in the pachinko game machine PY of the basic embodiment is not installed in the pachinko game machine PY1. Further, the front door 23 is provided with a speaker 52 and a frame lamp 53 having a configuration different from that of the basic embodiment. The frame lamp 53 includes an upper frame lamp 53U arranged on the upper side and a lower frame lamp 53D arranged on the lower side.

Furthermore, a lock 302 for maintaining and releasing the closed state of the front door 23 (locking and unlocking the front door 23) is provided at the right end of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The lock 302 has a cylindrical structure and can be unlocked and locked using a special key owned by the game parlor.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a polishing device 303 and a lifting device 304 in order to circulate game balls internally. The polishing device 303 and the lifting device 304 are arranged at the lower part of the inner frame 22. The ejected balls that have passed through the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, and the out opening 19 and are discharged to the outside of the gaming area 6 are all collected once through the collection passage (not shown). (none).

The collection path is configured in a straight line or a gently curved shape so that even if a plurality of game balls flow in at the same time, they can be organized and stably flow down one ball at a time and at a constant speed. The collection passage is connected to a storage passage (not shown) in which the game balls circulating inside are finally stored, and the game balls collected in the collection passage then flow into the storage passage. Game balls collected as foul balls also flow into the storage passage. The game balls (ejected balls and foul balls) that have flowed into the storage passage are polished by a polishing device 303. The polished game ball is finally set (supplied) at a predetermined firing position by the lifting device 304 to the firing device 72.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained. Pachinko gaming machine PY1 does not include the payout control board 170 in the basic embodiment, but does include a frame control board 180. The frame control board 180 mainly controls game balls, such as firing, polishing, and transporting the game balls, and also controls and manages the number of balls held (game balls), which will be described later. FIG. 49 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration related to the game control board 100 and the frame control board 180. In addition, in FIG. 49, description of devices such as various display devices and various sensors connected to the game control board 100 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 49, the frame control board 180 is connected to a power supply board 190, and is supplied with power from the power supply board 190. Moreover, the frame control board 180 is connected to the game control board 100 so that bidirectional communication is possible. Therefore, it is possible to transmit signals (data/information) from the gaming control board 100 to the slot control board 180, and it is also possible to transmit signals (data/information) from the slot control board 180 to the gaming control board 100. . Furthermore, the frame control board 180 is connected to the card unit CU so that bidirectional communication is possible. Therefore, it is possible to transmit signals (data/information) from the card unit CU to the frame control board 180, and it is also possible to transmit signals (data/information) from the frame control board 180 to the card unit CU.

When the ball lending button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a signal (ball lending operation detection signal) indicating that the operation of the ball lending button has been detected to the card unit CU. . When the ball lending operation detection signal is input, the card unit CU outputs a signal indicating a request for ball lending (ball lending request signal) to the frame control board 180.

When the return button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a signal (return operation detection signal) indicating that the operation of the return button has been detected to the card unit CU. When the return operation detection signal is input, the card unit CU outputs a signal indicating that a return is requested (return request signal) to the frame control board 180.

Further, the card unit CU appropriately updates the credit balance recorded on the IC card in response to the operation of the ball lending button or the return button. When the ball lending button is operated, but the credit balance recorded on the IC card is less than the credit associated with one operation of the ball lending button, the card unit CU will not be able to lend the ball. It is configured not to output the operation detection signal to the frame control board 180.

Furthermore, although the firing device 72 is connected to the frame control board 180, the firing control circuit 175 is not connected thereto as in the basic embodiment. Although details will be described later, the frame control board 180 directly controls the firing of game balls by the firing device 72. Further, a polishing device 303 and a lifting device 304 are connected to the frame control board 180. Although a description of the polishing of game balls by the polishing device 303 and the control of the lifting of game balls by the lifting device 304 will be omitted, the frame control board 180 controls the polishing device 303 and the lifting device 304 as appropriate. Polishing the game balls and transporting the game balls.

Furthermore, various sensors are connected to the frame control board 180 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the frame control board 180. Various sensors connected to the frame control board 180 include an unlock detection sensor 302a, a door open detection sensor 23a, an ejected ball detection sensor 310a, a fired ball detection sensor 311a, and a foul ball detection sensor 312a. .

The unlock detection sensor 302a can detect that the lock 302 is unlocked, and when it detects the unlock, it sends a signal (unlock detection signal) indicating that the lock 302 is unlocked to the frame control board. Output to 180. The door open detection sensor 23a can detect that the front door 23 is open, and when it detects the open, it sends a signal (door open detection signal) indicating that the front door 23 is open to the frame control board 180. Output to.

The ejected ball detection sensor 310a detects game balls that are ejected to the outside of the gaming area 6 through the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, and the out opening 19. It is installed in the collection passageway that collects the discharged balls all at once. The ejected ball detection sensor 310a is capable of detecting ejected balls, and when detecting an ejected ball, outputs a signal (ejected ball detection signal) indicating that an ejected ball has occurred to the frame control board 180. In addition, a safe ball is a game ball that passes through the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening 14 and is discharged to the outside of the gaming area 6, and the out ball is: Since it refers to a game ball that passes through the out port 19 and is ejected to the outside of the game area 6, the ejected ball is a combination of a safe ball and an out ball, and basically, a ball that enters the game area 6. Match the game ball you played.

The launched ball detection sensor 311a can detect a game ball (launched ball) that is launched from a predetermined launch position toward the game area 6 and is moving within the launch area 7 toward the game area 6, and detects the launch ball. When detected, a signal indicating that a shot ball has occurred (shot ball detection signal) is output to the frame control board 180. Note that the fired ball detection sensor 311a is configured not to detect game balls that are fired but fail to reach the game area 6 and move toward a predetermined firing position (backflow).

The foul ball detection sensor 312a is capable of detecting a game ball (foul ball) that is fired but fails to reach the game area 6, moves toward a predetermined firing position (backflow), and is recovered. When a ball is detected, a signal indicating that a foul ball has occurred (foul ball detection signal) is output to the frame control board 180. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, a foul ball is a foul ball collected between the boundary between the game area 6 and the shooting area 7 and a predetermined shooting position from which the game ball is shot by the game ball shooting device 7. It is collected through the mouth (not shown). The foul ball collection port allows the game balls fired toward the game area 6 to pass through without causing any hindrance, and also allows the game balls fired but not to reach the game area 6 to reach a predetermined position. The game ball is configured to be able to collect the game balls that have returned to the firing position. The foul ball detection sensor 312a is provided at the foul ball collection port.

In addition, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a, the fired ball detection sensor 311a, the foul ball detection sensor 312a, the general winning opening sensor 10a, the first starting opening sensor 11a, the second starting opening sensor 12a, the gate sensor 13a, and the big winning opening The sensor 14a is configured to be able to detect a stainless steel game ball (non-magnetic game ball) that does not stick to a magnet (has no magnetism, is non-magnetic). In addition, since it is configured to be able to detect stainless steel game balls that do not stick to magnets, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a, the fired ball detection sensor 311a, the foul ball detection sensor 312a, the general winning hole sensor 10a, the first The starting opening sensor 11a, the second starting opening sensor 12a, the gate sensor 13a, and the big winning opening sensor 14a have a higher iron content and stick to the magnet (have magnetism) than stainless steel game balls that do not stick to the magnet. It also detects steel game balls (magnetic game balls).

Further, the frame control board 180 is connected to the number-of-balls display device 301 for bidirectional communication. Therefore, it is possible to transmit signals (data/information) from the frame control board 180 to the number of balls held display device 301, and also to transmit signals (data/information) from the number of balls held display device 301 to the frame control board 180. is possible.

The ball count display device 301 consists of six 7-segment LEDs arranged in parallel in the left and right direction, and can be operated by pressing down on the ball count display 301b that displays the number of balls held. A ball count display button 301k that displays the number of balls held on the display 301b, a display button detection sensor 301a that detects an operation on the ball count display button 301k, and a display device side ball count BU that stores the number of balls held. 301d. When the number of balls display button 301k is operated, the display button detection sensor 301a sends a signal (display button detection signal) indicating that the number of balls display button 301k has been operated to the frame control board 180. Output.

Here, the number of balls held will be explained. The number of balls held is the number of game balls that a player can use in a game. As described above, since the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is configured as an enclosed gaming machine, game balls are not physically paid out to the player. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 electronically controls and manages the number of balls held. When the ball rental button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the number of balls held is added by the number of game balls associated with the operation of the ball rental button. The number of game balls associated with this ball lending button operation can be set as appropriate, but in the first embodiment, it is assumed that it is set to 250, for example.

Furthermore, when a game ball wins a prize (a safe ball occurs), the number of balls held is added by the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning hole in which the game ball is won. This number can also be set as appropriate, but for example, in the first embodiment, there are 10 general winning holes 10, 4 first starting holes 11, 2 second starting holes 12, and 2 big winning holes 14. It is assumed that the number is set to 15. Further, the number of balls held is subtracted by one each time a game ball is shot. On the other hand, when a game ball is collected from the foul ball collection port and a foul ball occurs, the number of balls held is incremented by one each time a foul ball occurs.

In addition, the sensors 10a, 11a, 12a, and 14a corresponding to various winning openings output respective detection signals to the game control board 100 when they detect winnings, but the gaming control board 100 outputs detection signals related to winnings. When input, the prize ball processing related to various winning holes in the sensor detection process (S104) (general winning hole prize ball processing (S202), second starting hole prize ball processing (S208), first starting hole prize ball processing (S215) In the big winning opening prize ball process (S224)), a command indicating the number of prize balls (prize ball number designation command) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the set prize ball number designation command is sent to the game control side timer. It is transmitted to the frame control board 180 in the output process (S101) of the interrupt process (S005). That is, information regarding the number of prize balls is transmitted from the game control board 100 to the slot control board 180.

Furthermore, a one-chip microcomputer for frame control (hereinafter referred to as "frame control microcomputer") 181 is mounted on the frame control board 180 to control and manage the game balls and the number of balls held according to the program. Therefore, the frame control board 180 can be positioned as a control unit that performs control regarding the firing of game balls, predetermined matters other than firing (polishing and transportation), and control and management regarding the number of balls held.

The frame control microcomputer 181 includes a frame control ROM 183 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the firing of game balls, predetermined matters other than firing (polishing and transporting), and controlling and managing the number of balls held. It includes a frame control RAM 184 used as a work memory and a frame control CPU 182 that executes programs stored in a frame control ROM 183.

The frame control ROM 183 stores programs for performing frame control main processing, frame control side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the frame control ROM 183 may be externally attached.

The frame control RAM 184 is provided with a number-of-balls storage unit 185 that stores data indicating the number of balls held. As mentioned above, the number of balls held is updated by operating the ball lending button, entering prizes into various winning slots 10, 11, 12, and 14, additions according to the occurrence of foul balls, and subtractions according to the occurrence of fired balls. However, this update is performed by the frame control CPU 182 based on the aforementioned ball lending request signal, prize ball number designation command, foul ball detection signal, and launched ball detection signal. Then, the frame control CPU 182 updates the data indicating the number of held balls stored in the held number of balls storage unit 185.

Further, the frame control RAM 184 is provided with a frame control side held ball number BU section 186. The frame control side number of balls held BU unit 186 is provided to back up data indicating the number of balls held stored in the number of balls held storage unit 185, and the frame control CPU 182 stores the number of balls held in the number storage unit 185. When updating the stored data indicating the number of balls held, the data indicating the number of balls held stored in the frame control side ball number BU section 186 is also updated with the same content.

The frame control side number of balls held BU section 186 includes a first number of balls held BU area 186a, a second number of balls held BU area 186b, and a third number of balls held BU area 186c. Each of the first number of balls held BU area 186a, the second number of balls held BU area 186b, and the third number of balls held BU area 186c stores data indicating the number of balls held as backup. Power supply to the frame control board 180 is stopped for the frame control side number of balls held BU section 186 (first number of balls held BU area 186a, second number of balls held BU area 186b, and third number of balls held BU area 186c). Even when the number of balls held on the frame control side BU unit 186 is held, the data (number of balls held) stored in the frame control side ball number BU unit 186 is configured to be retained. When updating the data indicating the number of held balls stored in the number of held balls storage unit 185, the frame control CPU 182 updates the data indicating the same number of held balls in the first number of held balls BU area 186a and the second held number of balls BU area 186a. The ball count BU area 186b and the third ball count BU area 186c are each overwritten and saved (backed up).

In the following, the data indicating the number of balls stored in the number of balls stored in the number of balls held storage unit 185 will be referred to as "number of balls held master data", and the data indicating the number of balls held in the number of balls held on the frame control side BU unit 186 will be referred to as the "number of balls held master data". The data indicating this is sometimes referred to as "frame control side ball count BU data." In addition, as "frame control side ball count BU data", data indicating the number of balls held stored in the first ball holding number BU area 186a is referred to as "first frame control side ball count BU data", and The data indicating the number of held balls stored in the 2nd number of balls held BU area 186b is referred to as "2nd frame control side held ball number BU data", and the data indicating the number of held balls stored in the third held balls number BU area 186c. The data indicating the number of balls held by the third frame control side BU data may be referred to as.

Further, the game RAM 104 of the game control microcomputer 101 is provided with a game control side held ball count BU unit 106 that stores data indicating the number of held balls in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit 105. In the following, the data indicating the number of balls held in the game control side ball count BU unit 106 will be referred to as "gaming control side ball count BU data", and the data is stored in the display device side ball count BU unit 301d. The data indicating the number of balls held by the player may also be referred to as "display device side ball count BU data."

7. Control of game balls and management of the number of balls held by the frame control microcomputer 181 [Frame control main processing]
Next, the control of game balls and the control/management of the number of held balls by the slot control microcomputer 181 will be explained based on FIGS. 50 to 60. Note that the flowcharts for controlling game balls and controlling/managing the number of balls to be held, etc., described below are just examples, and multiple processes in various flowcharts may be changed as appropriate to the extent that there is no inconsistency in the processing content. The execution order can be changed or they can be executed in parallel.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in controlling game balls and managing the number of balls held by the frame control microcomputer 181, which will be explained below, are provided in the frame control RAM 184. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", and the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF".

When supplied with power, the frame control microcomputer 181 reads out the frame control main processing program shown in FIG. 50 from the frame control ROM 183 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the frame control main processing, first, power-on processing (S5001) is performed. Here, the power-on processing (S5001) will be explained. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the power-on process (S5001), the frame control microcomputer 181 first sets permission for access to the frame control RAM 184 (S5101). This makes it possible to write and read information into and from the frame control RAM 184. Subsequently, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether the power-off flag is ON (S5102). The power outage flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of a power outage (that the power supply has been stopped), and is a flag that is turned on in a power outage monitoring process that will be described later.

If the power-off flag is not ON (NO in S5102), the frame control microcomputer 181 proceeds to step S5108 because there is a possibility that the power supply has not been stopped normally. On the other hand, if the power-off flag is ON (YES in S5102), the frame control microcomputer 181 calculates a checksum (S5103) and compares it with the checksum calculated at the time of power-off (S5104). ). Note that the checksum is calculated by treating various data stored in the frame control RAM 184 as numerical values and calculating the sum thereof. If the checksum values do not match (NO in S5104), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the storage contents of the frame control RAM 184 are not normal (abnormal), and proceeds to step S5108. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S5104), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the storage contents of the frame control RAM 184 are normal, and proceeds to step S5105.

In step S5105, the frame control microcomputer 181 manages the setting of the work area of the frame control RAM 184 at the time of power restoration (start of power supply). In this setting process, the frame control microcomputer 181 reads power restoration information from the frame control ROM 183 and sets this power restoration information in the work area of the frame control RAM 184. Thereafter, the frame control microcomputer 181 turns off the power-off flag (S5106), and proceeds to step S5107.

In step S5108, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether the number of balls held by the frame control side (the number of balls held by the frame control side BU data) stored in the number of balls held by the frame control side BU unit 186 is correct or incorrect. Specifically, as the frame control side ball count BU data stored in the frame control side ball count BU section 186, the first frame control side ball count BU data (first frame control side ball count BU area 186a (the number of balls held by the control side), the number of balls held by the second frame control side BU data (the number of balls held by the second frame control side BU area 186b), and the number of balls held by the third frame control side Although there is several BU data (the number of held balls stored in the third frame control side held balls number BU area 186c), the frame control microcomputer 181 judges that the number of held balls indicated by these data is all Determine whether they match.

If the number of balls held on the frame control side BU unit 186 is not normal, in other words, if the numbers of balls held do not all match (NO in S5108), the frame control microcomputer 181 informs the number of balls held on the frame control side BU unit 186 of the number of balls held on the frame control side. It is determined that the stored number of balls held by the frame control side BU data (the stored content of the number of balls held by the frame control side BU section 186) is not normal (abnormal), and the process advances to step S5114. On the other hand, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the frame control side ball count BU unit 186 is normal, in other words, if the number of balls held on the frame control side all match (YES in S5108), the frame control side ball count BU unit 186 is normal. It is determined that the frame control side ball count BU data (memory content of the frame control side ball count BU unit 186) stored in the frame control side ball count BU unit 186 is normal, and the process advances to step S5110.

In step S5110, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines the number of balls held by the first frame control side ball count BU data, the second frame control side ball count BU data, and the third frame control side ball count BU data, all of which are indicated. The number is stored (restored) in the number of balls held storage unit 185 as a normal value of the number of balls held. Subsequently, in step S5111, the frame control microcomputer 181 clears the area other than the held ball count storage unit 185 and the frame control side held ball count BU unit 186 in the frame control RAM 184.

Further, in step S5112, the frame control microcomputer 181 initializes the work area of the frame control RAM 184, and in step S5113, executes frame control RAM abnormality notification to notify that the frame control RAM 184 is not normal. Then, the process advances to step S5007.

In the initial setting of the work area of the frame control RAM 184 in step S5112, the initial setting information read from the frame control ROM 183 is set in the work area of the frame control RAM 184. Further, the frame control microcomputer 181 uses the image display device 50 to notify frame control RAM abnormality. However, since the frame control board 180 and the image display device 50 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 transmits a frame control RAM abnormality notification request signal requesting execution of frame control RAM abnormality notification. Output to the control board 100. When the frame control RAM abnormality notification request signal is input, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a frame control RAM abnormality notification designation command to the performance control board 120, which designates execution of frame control RAM abnormality notification.

When receiving the frame control RAM abnormality notification designation command, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the image display device 50 to display an image indicating that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal as a frame control RAM abnormality notification. Note that the specific content of the image indicating that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal can be set as appropriate, but the image indicating that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal may be, for example, It consists of an explanatory text indicating that this is the case, ``The frame control RAM is abnormal. Please call a store clerk.''

Furthermore, the slot control microcomputer 181 transmits a held ball count data request command to the game control board 100 in step S5114. This is because the memory content of the number of balls held by the frame control side BU unit 186 was not normal (abnormal), so the data indicating the number of balls held by the game control board 100 (game control side held balls This is to confirm the number of BU data). Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives the ball count data request command, it sends a command ( A command for specifying the number of balls held by the game control side is transmitted to the frame control board 180. The processing when the game control side receives the number-of-balls designation command will be described later.

Subsequently, the frame control microcomputer 181 clears the frame control RAM 184 in step S5115, and proceeds to step S5112.

In addition, in step S5107, the frame control microcomputer 181 performs other initial settings, such as settings for the frame control CPU 182, SIO, PIO, and CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), and Finish the input process.

The explanation returns to the frame control main process (FIG. 50). Following the power-on processing, the frame control microcomputer 181 disables interrupts (S5002) and executes output processing (S5003). In output processing, the frame control microcomputer 181 sends various commands and signals stored in the output buffer in the frame control RAM 184 of the frame control board 180 to the game control board 100, the card unit CU, and the ball count display device. 301 or to the launcher 72.

After completing the output process (S5003), the frame control microcomputer 181 permits an interrupt (S5004). While interrupts are enabled, frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) can be executed. The frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the frame control CPU 182 at a predetermined period (4 msec period in the first embodiment). That is, the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec.

[Frame control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) will be explained. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of frame control side timer interrupt processing. As shown in FIG. 52, in the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005), the frame control microcomputer 181 first executes input processing (S5201). In the input process (S5201), the frame control microcomputer 181 takes in various detection signals and various commands, and stores information indicated by the various detection signals and various commands in an input buffer provided in the frame control RAM 184.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the input process (S5201) and then the ball count restoration process (S5202). The number of balls held restoration process (S5202) is a process performed to restore data regarding the number of balls held when it is determined that the normality determination in the power-on process (S5001) is not normal (NO in S5109). It is. The ball count restoration process (S5202) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the ball count restoration process (S5202) and then the firing control process (S5203). The firing control process (S5203) is a process in which it is determined whether or not the game ball can be fired, and if it is possible to fire the game ball, the firing device 72 is made to fire the game ball. The firing control process (S5203) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the ball count management process (S5204) following the firing control process (S5203). The ball count management process (S5204) is a process for updating the number of balls held according to the progress of the game and controlling and managing the number of balls held electronically. The ball count management process (S5204) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes a fraud detection process (S5205) following the ball count management process (S5204). The fraud detection process (S5205) is a process for detecting that fraud is being carried out by mixing iron game balls into the pachinko game machine PY1. The fraud detection process (S5205) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes a firing prohibition process (S5206) following the fraud detection process (S5205). The firing prohibition process (S5206) is a process for detecting whether or not the lock 302 is unlocked and, depending on whether or not the lock 302 is unlocked, executing or canceling the prohibition on firing of game balls. The firing prohibition process (S5206) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the game ball entry prevention process (S5207) following the firing prohibition process (S5206). Game ball entry prevention processing (S5207) detects whether or not the front door 23 is opened, and executes or cancels the entry prevention of game balls into the gaming area 6 depending on whether or not the front door 23 is opened. This is a process for The game ball entry prevention process (S5207) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes other processes (S5208) following the game ball entry prevention process (S5207), and ends the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005). Other processing (S5208) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power supply is cut off, and updating of the timer provided in the frame control RAM 184.

As a power-off monitoring process, the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether a power-off signal has been input. The power-off signal is a signal that the power supply board 190 that monitors the power supply voltage outputs to the frame control board 180 when the power supply voltage starts to decrease due to the stoppage of power supply. When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that a power-off signal has been input, it calculates a checksum based on the data stored in the frame control RAM 184 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the frame control RAM 184. Turn on the power off flag. The frame control microcomputer 181 then prohibits access to the frame control RAM 184. This makes it impossible to write or read information into or from the frame control RAM 184. Thereafter, loop processing is performed without returning to frame control side timer interrupt processing.

In addition, the frame control microcomputer 181 updates various timers provided in the frame control RAM 184, which will be described later, by 4 msec as appropriate to update the timers provided in the frame control RAM 184.

Next, various processes (S5202 to S5207) in the timer interrupt process on the frame control side will be explained.

First, the ball count restoration process (S5202) will be explained. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the ball count restoration process. As shown in FIG. 53, in the number-of-balls restoration process (S5202), the slot control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not a game control side number-of-balls designation command indicating the number of balls is received (S5301). . As mentioned above, the game control side ball holding number designation command is used when the ball holding number data request command is sent to the game control board 100 in step S5113, and the game control microcomputer 101 controls the frame control board in response to the transmission. This is a command sent to 180.

As will be described later, each time the frame control microcomputer 181 updates the number of balls in possession in the number of balls management process (S5203), the frame control microcomputer 181 sends a command (update number of balls to specified command) to the game control board 100. When the game control microcomputer 101 receives the command to update the number of balls held, the game control side ball count BU provided in the gaming RAM 104 uses the number of balls indicated by the command as game control side ball number BU data. The data is overwritten (backed up) in the section 106. When the game control microcomputer 101 receives the ball possession data request command, the game control side ball count BU data stored in the game control side ball count BU unit 106 indicates the number of balls held. A specified command is sent to the frame control board 180.

When determining that the frame control microcomputer 181 has received the number-of-balls designation command (YES in S5301), it determines whether the number of balls indicated by the number-of-balls designation command is greater than 0 (S5302). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls indicated by the number of balls specified command is greater than 0 (YES in S5302), in step S5303, the frame control microcomputer 181 stores the number of balls in the ball storage unit 185 and the frame control side. It is stored in the number of balls held BU section 186 (first number of balls held BU area 186a, second number of balls held BU area 186b, and third number of balls held BU area 186c). This is because the fact that the number of held balls indicated by the number of held balls specification command when the power is turned on is greater than 0 means that the data stored in the game control board 100 when the power is turned off is considered to be normal. This is because the game control side held ball count BU data stored in the board 100 is also considered to be normal, and the frame control board 180 restores the held ball count as a normal value.

Subsequently, in step S5304, the frame control microcomputer 181 sends a command (a held ball number information transmission request command) to the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184, requesting that data indicating the number of balls held be transmitted to the production control board 120. and completes the ball count restoration process (S5203). The fact that the process has proceeded to step S5304 means that the frame control RAM abnormality notification has been executed (S5113), so there is a possibility that the clerk at the game parlor will rush to the pachinko game machine PY1. This is to allow the clerk at the game parlor to easily check the number of balls held.

The number-of-balls information transmission request command set in the output buffer of the slot control RAM 184 is transmitted to the game control board 100 by output processing (S5003). When the game control board 100 receives the number-of-balls information transmission request command, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits data indicating the number of balls to the performance control board 120. When receiving the data indicating the number of balls held, the performance control board 120 stores the data indicating the number of balls held in the performance control side ball number storage unit (not shown) provided in the performance RAM 124.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 stores the number of balls held on the performance control side when the first performance button 40k receives a first specific operation (for example, a long press operation for 5 seconds) when the game is not being executed. The number of balls held, which is indicated by the data stored in the section, is displayed on the display section 50a. In addition, when the number of balls held is displayed on the display unit 50a, the production control microcomputer 121 receives a second specific operation (for example, a normal one-time push operation) on the first production button 40k. The number of balls held is erased on the display section 50a.

On the other hand, if the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls indicated by the game control side ball number designation command is not greater than 0, that is, the number of balls held = 0 (NO in S5302), the display device side A ball count data request signal is output to the ball count display device 301, and the ball count restoration process (S5202) is completed. This means that the number of balls held by the game control side held ball number designation command is "0" when the power is turned on, which means that the data stored in the game control board 100 when the power was turned off is abnormal, and the gaming RAM 104 is Since it is considered that the ball count has been cleared, as will be described later, to request data regarding the number of balls held (BU data on the display device side) stored in the ball count display device 301 as a further backup of the number of balls held. It is.

In addition, as will be described later, each time the frame control microcomputer 181 updates the number of balls held in the number of balls management process (S5203), the frame control microcomputer 181 sends a signal indicating the updated number of balls held as a backup of the data indicating the number of balls held. (Ball number update designation signal) is output to the ball number display device 301. When the ball count update designation signal is input, the ball count display device 301 overwrites and saves the ball count indicated by the signal in the display device side ball count BU section 301d as the display device side ball count BU data. . When the display device side ball count data request signal is input, the ball count display device 301 displays the ball count indicated by the display device side ball count BU data stored in the display device side ball count BU section 301d. A holding number designation signal indicating the number of balls held is transmitted to the frame control board 180.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that it has not received the number-of-balls designation command (S5301: NO), it determines whether the number-of-balls designation signal has been input (S5306). If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the display device side ball count designation signal has not been input (NO in S5306), it completes the ball count restoration process (S5202) and determines that the ball count designation signal has been input. Then (YES in S5306), it is determined whether the number of balls in possession indicated by the number of balls in possession designation signal is greater than 0 (S5307).

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls indicated by the number-of-balls designation signal is greater than 0 (YES in S5307), the frame control microcomputer 181 stores the number of balls in the ball storage unit 185 and the frame control side in step S5308. The ball count is stored in the ball count BU section 186 (first ball count BU area 186a, second ball count BU area 186b, and third ball count BU area 186c), and the ball count restoration process (S5202) is completed. . This is because if the number of balls indicated by the ball number designation signal is greater than 0, it is considered that the ball number BU data on the display device side stored in the ball number display device 301 is normal. This is to restore the number of held balls as a normal value on the frame control board 180.

On the other hand, if the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls indicated by the display device side ball number designation signal is not greater than 0, that is, the number of balls held = 0 (NO in S5306), in step S5309, the number of balls held is An error notification for the number of balls held is executed to notify that the number of balls held is abnormal, and the ball number restoration process (S5203) is completed. This is because the number of balls held by the display device side ball count designation signal is "0", which means that the number of balls held BU data on the display device side stored in the number of balls held display device 301 is abnormal. This is because there is no further backup of the number of balls held, so if an abnormality occurs in the number of balls held, an error notification for the number of balls held is executed to notify the abnormality.

The number-of-balls error notification is executed by the number-of-balls display 301b of the number-of-balls display device 301. Therefore, in step S5309, the frame control microcomputer 181 sets a signal requesting execution of ball count error notification (ball count error notification request signal) in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The number of balls held error notification request signal set in the output buffer is output to the number of balls held display device 301 in the output process (S5003), and the number of balls held display device 301 displays the number of balls held when the number of balls held error notification request signal is input. Executes error notification.

Note that the content of the presentation of the ball count error notification can be designed as appropriate, but in the first embodiment, for example, the word "ERROR" indicating an error is displayed in the last five digits consisting of six 7-segment LEDs. Is displayed. Further, the frame control microcomputer 181 may notify the ball count error by displaying an image on the display unit 50a or outputting a predetermined sound and warning sound from the speaker 52.

Furthermore, the frame control microcomputer 181 may set a command requesting the execution of the ball count error notification in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 in step S5309. The command set in the output buffer is sent to the game control board 100 in the output process (S5003), and upon receiving the command, the game control board 100 sends a command to the production control board 120 to designate the execution of ball count error notification. When the production control board 120 receives the command, the production control board 120 may appropriately cause the image display device 50 or the speaker 52 to notify the held ball number error.

Next, the launch control process (S5203) will be explained. FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of launch control processing. As shown in FIG. 54, in the firing control process (S5203), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether the number of held balls indicated by the held ball number master data is greater than "0" (S5301). This is because the number of balls held by the player is the number of game balls that the player can use for the game, and the game cannot be played unless the number of balls held is greater than "0".

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls held is not greater than "0", that is, the number of balls held = "0" (NO in S5401), the process proceeds to step S5419, and the number of balls held is greater than "0". If it is determined that (YES in S5401), it indicates whether the lock 302 is unlocked or not, in other words, it indicates that the firing of game balls is prohibited because the lock 302, which will be described later, is unlocked. It is determined whether the firing prohibition flag is turned on (S5402). This is because if the lock 302 is unlocked, the front door 23 will be opened and the fired game balls will fly out of the pachinko game machine PY1 and there is a risk of losing the game balls. This is because it is necessary to prohibit firing. Note that the firing prohibition flag is basically turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 when the lock 302 is unlocked.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the lock 302 is unlocked (YES in S5402), the process proceeds to step S5419, and if it determines that the lock 302 is not unlocked (YES in S5402), the firing handle 72k is It is determined whether the touch switch 72a is being touched by the player, in other words, whether a detection signal from the touch switch 72a is being input (S5403). This is to make the player operating the firing handle 72k a condition for firing the game ball, and to prevent the firing handle 72k from being fixed using a coin or a predetermined device.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing handle 72k is not touched by the player (NO in S5403), the process proceeds to step S5419, and if it determines that the firing handle 72k is touched by the player (YES in S5403). ), it is determined whether the firing handle 72k is being operated, in other words, whether a detection signal from the firing volume knob 72b is being input (S5404). This is because the game ball can be fired by operating the firing handle 72k.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing handle 72k is not being operated (NO in S5404), the process proceeds to step S5419, and if determining that the firing handle 72k is being operated (YES in S5404), it executes a firing delay. In other words, it is determined whether a firing delay flag, which will be described later, is turned on (S5405).

The firing delay is a predetermined unit firing delay in order to adjust the number of game balls fired per unit time (fixed time such as 60 seconds) to a predetermined value while the firing handle 72k is continuously operated. Delay the start of the control (delay the cycle once by N balls), change the cycle related to game ball launch for local unit launch control, and adjust the overall cycle related to game ball launch control (firing cycle change control). In other words, unit firing control is control related to one firing of game balls, and in order to adjust the number of game balls fired per unit time to a predetermined value, unit firing control is a control related to one firing of game balls. , and an interval (launch standby) in which the firing is made to wait until the next game ball can be fired after the firing, and is executed at a predetermined period. Details of the firing delay (firing cycle change control) and unit firing control will be described later. Note that the firing delay flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 while the firing delay (firing cycle change control) is being executed (while the firing delay is being executed). Further, although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, the firing delay (firing cycle change control) is executed for the same time as the time required for one frame control timer interrupt process.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing delay is being executed (YES in S5405), it cancels the firing delay, specifically, turns off the firing delay flag (S5418), so that the firing delay is not being executed. If it is determined (NO in S5405), it is determined whether or not firing standby is being executed, in other words, whether or not a firing standby flag, which will be described later, is turned on (S5406).

Execution of launch standby means that while the launch handle 72k continues to be operated, the unit for launching one game ball is adjusted so that the number of game balls launched per unit time becomes a predetermined value. This is to put the game balls on standby in the firing control. Details of launch standby will be described later. Note that the firing standby flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 while the firing standby is being executed (while the firing standby is being executed).

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that firing standby is in progress (YES in S5406), the process proceeds to step S5412, and if it determines that firing standby is not in progress (NO in S5406), the frame control microcomputer 181 controls the game ball to be started from now on. It is determined whether the firing (unit firing control) corresponds to the start of unit firing control, in other words, whether the counter value of the firing delay activation counter described later is "0" (S5407).

The unit firing control is a control related to the firing of game balls that is performed in order to adjust the number of game balls fired per unit time to a predetermined value while the firing handle 72k continues to be operated. It consists of unit firing control a predetermined number of times (four times in the first embodiment) and firing delay (firing cycle change control) a predetermined number of times (one time in the first embodiment), and is executed at a predetermined cycle as a whole. . Although the details will be described later, in unit firing control, after repeatedly executing unit firing control related to firing one game ball multiple times (four times in the first embodiment), firing delay (firing cycle change control) is executed. It is executed a predetermined number of times (once in the first embodiment). The firing delay activation counter counts the remaining number of times the game ball is fired in one unit firing control, and is provided in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. The firing of the game ball when the counter value of the firing delay activation counter is "0" constitutes the start of unit firing control.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines to start the unit launch control (YES in S5407), the frame control microcomputer 181 starts the unit launch control from now on, so it calculates the number of game balls fired in one unit launch control (the number of unit launches). ) is set in the firing delay activation counter (S5408), and the process advances to step S5409. If it is determined that unit firing control is not to be started (NO in S5407), since unit firing control is in the middle, the process directly advances to step S5409. Note that in the first embodiment, the number of units fired is set to four.

In step S5409, the frame control microcomputer 181 controls the firing device 72 in response to the detection signal from the firing volume knob 72b in order to cause the firing device 72 to fire the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the operation of the firing handle 72k. Can fire game balls. Subsequently, the frame control microcomputer 181 executes launch standby in order to provide an interval in which no game balls are launched after the launch of the game ball (S5410), and sets an execution period for the launch standby (S5411). , the firing control process ends.

The firing standby is executed by turning on the firing standby flag in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. Further, the execution period of the firing standby is set using a firing standby counter. The firing standby counter is provided in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184, and calculates the number of times the frame control timer interrupt process is executed (150 times in the first embodiment) corresponding to the period during which firing is executed. By setting this, the execution period of the launch standby is set.

Note that the timer interrupt process for frame control is executed every 4 msec, so the interval until the next game ball launch, in other words, the time required for one unit launch control is 600 msec (4 msec x 150 times). )It turns out that.

Further, the frame control microcomputer 181 updates the remaining period of the execution period of firing standby (remaining firing waiting period) in step S5412, and determines whether to end firing waiting in step S5413. The remaining firing standby period is updated by subtracting "1" from the counter value of the firing standby counter. Further, the determination as to whether or not to end the firing standby is made by checking whether or not the counter value of the firing standby counter is "0".

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing standby is not to end, that is, if the counter value of the firing standby counter is not "0" (NO in S5413), the frame control microcomputer 181 starts the firing standby (interval) for one unit firing control. Since it is in the middle of the process, the launch control process ends immediately. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines to end the firing standby, that is, when the counter value of the firing standby counter is "0" (YES in S5413), the frame control microcomputer 181 controls the firing standby (interval ), the launch standby ends (S5414), the remaining period until the launch delay is executed (remaining launch delay execution period) is updated (S5415), and it is determined whether or not to start the launch delay (S5415). S5416).

The firing standby is ended by turning off the firing standby flag. The remaining firing delay execution period is updated by subtracting "1" from the counter value of the firing delay activation counter. Further, the determination as to whether or not to start the firing delay is made by checking whether or not the counter value of the firing delay activation counter is "0".

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing delay is not to be started, that is, when the counter value of the firing delay activation counter is not "0" (NO in S5416), the frame control microcomputer 181 causes the game ball to be fired before performing the firing delay. If it is determined that the launch delay is to be started, that is, if the counter value of the launch delay activation counter is "0" (YES in S5416), the launch delay is started (S5417) and the launch control processing is executed. finish. The firing delay is executed by turning on the firing delay flag.

Further, the frame control microcomputer 181 performs a reset process related to the launch control process in step S5418, and then ends the launch control process. Note that the reset process related to the launch control process is performed by resetting flags and counters related to the launch control process. As a result, the unit firing control and the unit firing control are stopped, and when the game ball is fired again, the unit firing control and the unit firing control are executed from the beginning.

Next, the game ball firing control by the frame control microcomputer 181 when the firing handle 72k continues to be operated in a situation where the firing of game balls is permitted will be explained. As long as the firing handle 72k continues to be operated, the frame control microcomputer 181 executes the firing control process (S5204), particularly steps S5405 to S5417, so that game balls are fired intermittently. When this intermittent firing is performed, the number of game balls fired per unit time (specific number of fired balls) is the largest, and the frame control microcomputer 181 controls the number of game balls fired per minute. The firing of game balls is controlled so that the number of game balls (number of game balls fired) is approximately 99.83. This is stipulated by the prescribed rules that the number of game balls fired per minute should be less than 100, but if the number of game balls fired per unit time becomes extremely low, the game store will be required to issue a refund. This is to moderate the number of game balls fired per unit time within a range that does not exceed the upper limit, even though there is a risk of incurring profits. However, since the clock that causes the frame control microcomputer 181 to perform frame control side timer interrupt processing may fluctuate due to changes in the frequency of the crystal oscillator due to room temperature deviation and frequency temperature characteristics, the number of game balls fired per minute is It is not appropriate to make the value as close to 100 as possible.

Here, FIG. 55 shows a time chart showing an example of game ball firing control when the firing handle 72k continues to be operated. As mentioned above, there are two types of game ball launch control: unit launch control and unit launch control.

Unit launch control is a basic unit of control related to one launch of a game ball, starts with the launch of a game ball, and ends when 600 msec has elapsed since the launch. Therefore, the unit firing control forms a period (firing cycle) for firing one game ball. In one unit firing control, a period from when a game ball is fired for the first time until 600 msec has elapsed is a firing standby period, and constitutes an interval period in which no game balls are fired. Note that the 600 msec interval is the period for 150 firing control processes (frame control timer interrupt processing), since the frame control side timer interrupt process, which includes the fire control process (S5203), is executed every 4 msec. It turns out that. Therefore, when the frame control microcomputer 181 causes the game ball to be fired in the firing control process (frame control side timer interrupt process), it then fires the game ball in the 150th firing control process (frame control side timer interrupt process). The player waits for the game ball to be launched.

Unit launch control is a basic unit of control related to the launch of game balls four times, and is composed of four consecutive unit launch controls and one launch delay (launch cycle change control). Since the firing control process (timer interrupt process on the frame control side) is executed every 4 msec, if you continue to execute the unit firing control without delaying the firing (launching cycle change control), the number of game balls in one minute will increase. The number of shots is 100, and the rule of less than 100 is not met. Therefore, after executing unit firing control four times in a row, executing firing delay (firing cycle change control) once, and then starting the next unit firing control, the number of game balls fired in one minute can be reduced. be less than 100. Then, one unit launch control is composed of these four consecutive unit launch controls and one launch delay (launch cycle change control), and overall, this unit launch control is repeated as one set. We will carry it out. As a result, the number of game balls fired per minute is approximately 99.83. Note that the time required for one firing delay (firing cycle change control) is 4 msec. That is, one firing delay (firing cycle change control) corresponds to one period of firing control processing (frame control side timer interrupt processing).

Next, the ball count management process (S5204) will be explained. FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the ball count management process. As shown in FIG. 56, in the ball possession management process (S5204), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not the ball lending button displayed on the unit display device 300 has been operated (S5501). As described above, when the ball lending button is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a ball lending operation detection signal indicating that the operation has been detected to the card unit CU. When the ball lending operation detection signal is input, the card unit CU outputs a signal indicating a request for ball lending (ball lending request signal) to the frame control board 180. Therefore, in step S5501, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether a ball lending request signal has been input.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ball lending button has not been operated (NO in S5501), the process proceeds to step S5504, and if it determines that the ball lending button has been operated (YES in S5501), it starts the game according to the ball lending. The number of balls (250 in the first embodiment) is added to the number of balls held (S5502), an update flag indicating that the number of balls held has been updated is turned on (S5503), and the process advances to step S5504.

The addition of the number of balls held in step S5502 is performed by adding the number of game balls according to the ball loan to the number of balls indicated by the number of balls master data stored in the number of balls storage unit 185. Further, the update flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184.

In step S5504, the slot control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not there is a win (occurrence of a safe ball) in the winning holes (general winning hole 10, first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, big winning hole 14). judge. As mentioned above, when there is a prize in each prize opening (occurrence of a safe ball), the game control microcomputer 101 sends a command (prize ball number designation command) indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the frame control board 180. Send to. Therefore, in step S5504, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not a command for specifying the number of prize balls has been received.

When the slot control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no winning (occurrence of a safe ball) in the winning openings (general winning opening 10, first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, big winning opening 14) (NO in S5504). ), the process proceeds to step S5507, and if it is determined that there has been a win in the winning holes (general winning hole 10, first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, big winning hole 14) (YES in S5504), the number of prize balls is The corresponding number of prize balls is added to the number of balls held (S5505), the update flag is turned ON (S5506), and the process advances to step S5507.

The addition to the number of balls held in step S5505 is performed by adding the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls designation command to the number of balls shown by the number of balls master data stored in the number of balls storage unit 185. be exposed. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls based on winning in the general winning opening 10 is 10, the number of prize balls based on winning in the first starting opening 11 is four, and the number of winning balls based on winning in the first starting opening 11 is 4. The number of prize balls based on winning the prize is 2 balls, and the number of prize balls based on winning the big winning hole 14 is 15 balls.

The frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether there is a foul ball in step S5507. As described above, when a foul ball occurs, the foul ball detection sensor 312a outputs a foul ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not a foul ball detection signal has been input in step S5507.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no foul ball (NO in S5507), it proceeds to step S5510, and if it determines that there is a foul ball (YES in S5507), it determines the number of game balls (1) according to the foul ball. ) is added to the number of balls held (S5508), an update flag is turned ON (S5509), and the process advances to step S5510. The addition of the number of held balls in step S5508 is performed by adding “1” to the number of held balls indicated by the number of held balls master data stored in the number of held balls storage unit 185. This is because foul balls are detected one by one, and the number of balls held increases by one due to the occurrence of a foul ball.

The frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether there is a shot ball in step S5510. As described above, when a shot ball is generated, the shot ball detection sensor 311a outputs a shot ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether a shot ball detection signal has been input in step S5510.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no fired ball (NO in S5510), the process proceeds to step S5513, and if it determines that there is a fired ball (YES in S5510), it determines the number of game balls (1) according to the fired ball. ) is subtracted from the number of balls held (S5511), an update flag is turned on (S5512), and the process advances to step S5513. The subtraction from the number of balls held in step S5511 is performed by subtracting "1" from the number of balls shown by the ball number master data stored in the ball number storage unit 185. This is because the fired balls are detected one by one, and the number of balls held decreases by one due to the occurrence of a fired ball.

In step S5513, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether the update flag is turned on, in other words, whether the number of held balls has been added or subtracted (updated). If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the update flag is not turned on (NO in S5513), the process proceeds to step S5518. On the other hand, if the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the update flag is ON (YES in S5513), the frame control microcomputer 181 updates the number of balls held for frame control in order to back up the number of balls held since the number of balls held has been updated. A backup process is performed (S5514), a backup process for the number of balls held for game control is performed (S5515), a backup process for the number of balls held for the display device is performed (S5516), and the process advances to step S5518.

The number of balls held for frame control backup processing indicates the number of balls shown by the number of balls held master data, and the number of balls held by the first frame control side BU data stored in the first number of balls held BU area 186a, and the second number of balls held. The data is reflected (overwritten and saved) on the second frame control side ball count BU data stored in the number BU area 186b and the third frame control side ball count BU data stored in the third ball count BU area 186c. It is done by

The ball count backup process for game control is performed by setting a ball count update designation command indicating the number of balls indicated by the ball count master data in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The number of balls held update designation command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the game control board 100 by output processing (S5003). Although not shown, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives the command to update the number of balls held, the game control microcomputer 101 updates the number of balls indicated by the command with the number of balls held by the game control side stored in the number of balls held on the game control side BU unit 106. Reflect (overwrite and save) the pitch count BU data. As a result, the data regarding the number of balls backed up by the game control board 100 is updated.

The ball count backup process for the display device is performed by setting a ball count update designation signal indicating the number of balls held by the ball count master data in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The ball count update designation signal set in the output buffer is transmitted to the ball count display device 301 through output processing (S5003). Although not shown, when the ball count update designation signal is input, the ball count display device 301 converts the number of balls indicated by the signal into the ball count on the display device side stored in the ball count storage area 301d. Reflect (overwrite and save) the BU data. As a result, the data regarding the number of balls held that is backed up by the number of balls held display device 301 is updated.

The frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the return button displayed on the unit display device 300 has been operated in step S5518. As described above, when the return button is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a return operation detection signal indicating that the operation has been detected to the card unit CU. When the return operation detection signal is input, the card unit CU outputs a signal indicating that a return is requested (return request signal) to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether a return request signal has been input in step S5518.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the return button has not been operated (NO in S5518), it completes the ball count management process, and if it determines that the return button has been operated (YES in S5518), the frame control microcomputer 181 performs the operation of the return button. In order to clear the information regarding the number of balls held in accordance with the above, the number of balls held for frame control clear processing is performed (S5519), the number of balls held for game control is cleared (S5520), and the number of balls held for display device backup processing is performed. (S5521), and sets the number-of-balls signal indicating the number of balls indicated by the number-of-balls master data in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 (S5522), and ends the number-of-balls management process.

The number of balls held for frame control clearing process clears the number of balls held storage section 185 and the number of balls held on the frame control side BU section 186, as well as clearing various data related to the number of balls held.

The number of balls held for game control clearing processing is performed by setting a number of balls held clear designation command that instructs to clear data related to the number of balls held in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The held ball count clear designation command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the game control board 100 by output processing (S5003). Although not shown, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives the ball count clear designation command, it clears the game control side ball count BU data stored in the game control side ball count BU section 106. As a result, the data regarding the number of held balls stored in the game control board 100 is erased.

The display control ball count clearing process is performed by setting a ball count clear designation signal instructing to clear data related to the number of balls held in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The ball count clear designation signal set in the output buffer is output to the ball count display device 301 through output processing (S5003). Although not shown, when the ball count clear designation signal is input, the ball count display device 301 clears the display device side ball count BU data stored in the display device side ball count BU section 301d. As a result, the data regarding the number of balls held that is stored in the ball number display device 301 is erased.

Further, the number-of-balls signal set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 in step S5522 is output to the card unit CU through output processing (S5003). When the number-of-balls signal is input, the card unit CU updates the number of balls recorded on the IC card to the number of balls indicated by the number-of-balls signal.

Please note that after the return button is operated, safe balls, out balls, foul balls, and shot balls occur, resulting in a difference between the number of balls recorded on the IC card and the actual number of balls held. In order to prevent this, the operation of the return button may be restricted to a state where no game is being played.

Next, the fraud detection process (S5205) will be explained. FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of fraud detection processing. As shown in FIG. 57, in the fraud detection process (S5205), the frame control microcomputer 181 first checks whether or not there is an ejected ball, in other words, whether or not the ejected ball detection signal from the ejected ball detection sensor 310a has been input. (S5601). As mentioned above, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a passes through various winning holes (general winning hole 10, first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, big winning hole 14) and is ejected to the outside of the gaming area 6. It is installed in a recovery path where game balls (safe balls) and game balls (out balls) passed through the out port 19 and discharged to the outside of the game area 6 are collected and collected into one. In other words, the game balls that have entered the game area 6 always end up passing through the collection path as discharged balls.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is an ejected ball (YES in S5601), it determines whether or not the ejected ball detection time is being measured, in other words, the ejected ball indicating that the ejected ball detection time is being measured. It is determined whether the detection time measurement flag is ON (S5602). The ejected ball detection time measurement flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. The ejected ball detection time is the time during which the ejected ball detection sensor 310a outputs an ejected ball detection signal, in other words, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet or a stainless steel game ball. This is the time of detection.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ejected ball detection time has not been measured (NO in S5602), it starts measuring the ejected ball detection time (S5603), and ends the fraud detection process (S5206). The measurement of the ejected ball detection time is started by turning on the ejected ball detection time measurement flag in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. Note that the fact that it is determined in step S5602 that the ejected ball detection time is not measured means that the ejected ball detection signal has changed from OFF to ON. This is because measurement of the ejected ball detection time is started when the ejected ball detection signal changes from OFF (undetected) to ON (detected).

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ejected ball detection time is being measured (S5602: YES), it updates the ejected ball detection time (S5604), and ends the fraud detection process (S5206). The ejected ball detection time is measured by adding the time for one frame control timer interrupt process (4 msec) to the ejected ball detection time timer provided in the frame control RAM 184. Note that the fact that it is determined in step S5602 that the ejected ball detection time is being measured means that the ejected ball detection signal continues to be ON. This is because the ejected ball detection time is measured while the ejected ball detection signal is ON. Therefore, the ejected ball detection time timer indicates the time during which the ejected ball detection signal is ON.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no ejected ball (NO in S5601), it also determines whether the ejected ball detection time is being measured, in other words, whether the ejected ball detection time measurement flag is ON. (S5605). If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ejected ball detection time has not been measured (NO in S5605), it immediately ends the fraud detection process (S5205).

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ejected ball detection time is being measured (S5605: YES), the ejected ball detection time, in other words, the value indicated by the ejected ball detection time timer has reached a predetermined illegally specified time (for example, 12 msec) (S5606). If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ejected ball detection time is not longer than a predetermined fraudulently designated time (for example, 12 msec) (NO in S5606), the process proceeds to step S5608, and the ejected ball detection time is determined to be a predetermined fraudulently designated time. If it is determined that the time is longer than the time (for example, 12 msec) (YES in S5606), an unauthorized notification is performed (S5607).

Here, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a will be explained. As mentioned above, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a detects stainless steel game balls that do not stick to magnets, but does not detect stainless steel game balls, which have a higher iron content than stainless steel game balls and stick to magnets. It also detects game balls. As for the specifications of the ejected ball detection sensor 310a, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a detects passing game balls for a longer period of time when the ball is made of steel, which sticks to the magnet, than when it is made of stainless steel, which does not stick to the magnet, and turns on. Become. Therefore, an incorrect designated time is set so that you can tell the difference between stainless steel and steel. Conversely, if a stainless steel game ball that does not stick to a magnet passes the ejected ball detection sensor 310a, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a will not continue to turn on the ejected ball detection signal for an illegally designated time. Therefore, if the ejected ball detection time is longer than the predetermined illegally specified time (for example, 12 msec), it means that a conventional general steel game ball that sticks to a magnet has passed the ejected ball detection sensor 310a. This means that the pachinko game machine PY1 contains conventional game balls made of steel that stick to magnets. For example, when one stainless steel game ball that does not stick to a magnet passes the discharged ball detection sensor 310a, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a is in the ON state for a first time (t1), and the stainless steel game ball is turned on for a first time (t1). If one conventional game ball made of steel, which has a higher iron content than the ball and sticks to the magnet, passes through the ejected ball detection sensor 310a at the same speed, the time is longer than the first time (t1). Assuming that the specification is to enter the ON state at the second time (t2), the illegally specified time is set between the first time (t1) and the second time (t2). In addition, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a can distinguish and detect when two stainless steel game balls that do not stick to a magnet pass successively, but two steel game balls that stick to a magnet can The structure is such that it is not possible to distinguish between the two passages and detect them if they pass one after the other. Note that the specific value of the illegally specified time can be set as appropriate.

Further, the unauthorized notification in step S5607 is performed by outputting a predetermined alarm sound from the speaker 52. Since the frame control board 180 and the performance control board 120 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 has a higher iron content than a stainless steel game ball, and one game ball made of steel that sticks to a magnet. A fraud notification request command is set in the output buffer of the slot control RAM 184, which requests output of a predetermined alarm sound (execution of fraud notification) indicating that the pachinko game machine PY1 is contaminated (detected). do. The set unauthorized notification request command is transmitted to the game control board 100 by output processing (S5003). When the game control microcomputer 101 receives the fraudulent notification request command, it transmits a fraudulent notification designation command that designates execution of fraudulent notification to the production control board 120. When the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the fraudulent notification designation command, it appropriately executes fraudulent notification.

In step S5608, the frame control microcomputer 181 finishes measuring the ejected ball detection time and ends the fraud detection process (S5206). The measurement of the ejected ball detection time is ended by turning off the ejected ball detection time measurement flag and resetting the ejected ball detection time timer.

Next, the firing prohibition process (S5206) will be explained. FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of firing prohibition processing. As shown in FIG. 58, in the firing prohibition process (S5206), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether the lock 302 is unlocked (S5701). As described above, the unlock detection sensor 302a is configured to be able to detect that the lock 302 is unlocked, and outputs an unlock detection signal to the frame control board 180 when the lock 302 is unlocked. . Therefore, in step S5701, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether the unlock detection signal from the unlock detection sensor 302a is input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the lock 302 is unlocked (YES in S5701), it determines whether or not the firing of game balls is prohibited (launching is prohibited) (S5702). If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that firing is not prohibited (NO in S5702), it immediately ends the firing prohibition process (S5702). On the other hand, if the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that firing is prohibited (YES in S5702), it prohibits the firing of game balls (prohibits firing) (S5703), and issues a notification that firing is prohibited. The notification effect is executed (S5704), and the firing prohibition process (S5207) is finished.

Note that the fact that it is determined in step S5702 that firing is not prohibited means that the unlock detection signal has changed from OFF to ON, in other words, that the lock 302 has been unlocked from a locked state. . This is because firing prohibition is started when the unlock detection signal changes from OFF to ON. Furthermore, if the lock 302 is unlocked from the locked state, there is a possibility that the front door 23 will be opened, and when the front door 23 is opened, the game balls will go outside of the pachinko game machine PY1. Since there is a risk of it flying off and being lost, a firing ban is implemented. The firing is prohibited by turning on the firing prohibition flag. The firing prohibition flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. This firing prohibition (firing) constitutes a condition (step S5402) for prohibiting the firing of game balls in the aforementioned firing control process (S5203). Specifically, in step S5402, it is determined that "firing is prohibited" (YES in S5402).

Further, the firing prohibition notification effect is performed on the unit display device 300. Since the frame control board 180 and the unit display device 300 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 generates a firing prohibition notification performance request signal that requests execution of a firing prohibition notification performance that notifies that firing is prohibited. is set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The firing prohibition notification performance request signal set in the output buffer is output to the card unit CU through output processing (S5003). When the firing prohibition notification performance request signal is input, the card unit CU causes the unit display device 300 to display an image indicating that firing is prohibited as a firing prohibition notification performance. The specific content of the image indicating that firing is prohibited can be set as appropriate, but for example, the image indicating that firing is prohibited may be accompanied by the explanatory text ``Launching game balls'' indicating that firing is prohibited. It is now in a state where it is no longer possible to do so.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the lock 302 is not unlocked (NO in S5701), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the firing of game balls is prohibited (launching is prohibited) (S5705). If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing is not prohibited (NO in S5705), it immediately ends the firing prohibition process (S5206), and if it determines that the firing is prohibited (YES in S5705), the frame control microcomputer 181 returns to the firing permission state. It is determined whether the server is on standby (S5706).

Waiting for the launch permission state is a transition period from a launch prohibition state to a state where the launch of game balls is permitted. Such a transition period is provided because the determination that firing is prohibited in step S5705 means that the unlock detection signal has changed from ON to OFF, in other words, the lock 302 has been unlocked. Although this means that the pachinko game machine PY1 has been locked, for example, a grace period may be necessary for a clerk at a game parlor to make a final check on the pachinko game machine PY1 after it has been locked. Furthermore, even while waiting for the firing permission state, firing of game balls is prohibited.

Note that the start of standby for the launch permission state is performed by turning on a launch permission state standby flag, which will be described later. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5706 whether or not the launch permission state standby flag is turned on. The launch permission state standby flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that it is not in standby for the launch permission state (NO in S5706), it starts waiting for the launch permission state (S5707), that is, it writes launch permission in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. The state standby flag is turned ON, a launch permission standby notification effect is executed to notify that the launch permission standby state will be reached (S5708), and the remaining time (launch permission standby time remaining) until the end of the standby until the launch permission state is terminated. Measurement is started (S5709), and the firing prohibition process (S5206) is finished.

The launch permission standby notification effect is performed on the unit display device 300. Since the frame control board 180 and the unit display device 300 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 displays a launch permission standby notification effect that requests execution of a launch permission standby notification effect that indicates that the launch will be on standby until the launch is permitted. A permission standby notification production request signal is set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The firing permission standby notification performance request signal set in the output buffer is output to the card unit CU through output processing (S5003). When the firing permission standby notification performance request signal is input, the card unit CU causes the unit display device 300 to display an image indicating that the firing permission standby notification performance will be on standby until firing is permitted. Note that the specific content of the image that indicates waiting until launch is permitted can be set as appropriate, but for example, the image that indicates waiting until launch is authorized is It consists of the explanatory text "Please wait a little longer until you can fire" to indicate that the weapon will be on standby.

Further, the remaining launch permission standby time is determined using a launch permission standby time timer. The launch permission standby time timer is provided in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184, and by setting the time to wait until a predetermined launch permission state (for example, 30 seconds) in the launch permission standby time timer, the launch permission standby time can be activated. Measuring the remaining time begins. Note that the firing permission standby time timer is subtracted by 4 msec in other processing (S5208) of the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005).

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that it is on standby for the launch permission state (S5706: YES), it determines whether to end the standby for the launch permission state (S5710). The end of standby for the launch permission state is performed when the launch permission standby time elapses after starting standby for the launch permission state, in other words, when the value of the launch permission standby time timer becomes "0". . Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether the value of the firing permission standby time timer is "0" in step S5710.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the standby to the launch permission state is not completed, that is, the value of the launch permission standby time timer is not "0" (NO in S5710), it immediately ends the launch prohibition process (S5206). do. On the other hand, the frame control microcomputer 181 ends the standby for the launch permission state, that is, when it determines that the value of the launch permission standby time timer is "0" (YES in S5710), it ends the standby for the launch permission state. (S5711), executes a firing permission notification effect to notify that firing of game balls is permitted (S5712), ends the firing prohibition (S5714), and ends the firing prohibition process (S5207).

Note that the standby for the launch permission state is ended by turning off the launch permission state standby flag. Further, the firing prohibition is ended by turning off the firing prohibition flag. As a result, it is determined in step S5402 that "firing is not prohibited" (NO in S5402).

Further, the firing permission notification effect is performed on the unit display device 300. Since the frame control board 180 and the unit display device 300 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 generates a launch permission notification effect that requests execution of a launch permission notification effect to notify that launch is permitted. Set in the output buffer of frame control RAM 184. The firing permission notification production request signal set in the output buffer is output to the card unit CU through output processing (S5003). When the firing permission notification performance request signal is input, the card unit CU causes the unit display device 300 to display an image indicating that firing is permitted as a firing permission notification performance. Note that the specific content of the image indicating that the launch has been authorized can be set as appropriate, but the image indicating that the launch has been authorized may be accompanied by, for example, the explanatory text "launch "Thank you for your cooperation."

Next, the game ball entry prevention process (S5207) will be explained. FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of game ball entry prevention processing. As shown in FIG. 59, in the game ball entry prevention process (S5207), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether the front door 23 is open (S5801). As described above, the door open detection sensor 23a is configured to be able to detect that the front door 23 is open, and outputs a door open detection signal to the frame control board 180 when the front door 23 is open. Therefore, in step S5801, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the front door open detection signal from the door open detection sensor 23a is input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the front door 23 is open (S5801: YES), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether the entry prevention device 76 is in operation (S5802).

Here, the entry prevention device 76 will be explained. The entry prevention device 76 includes an actuable entry prevention movable portion 76k and a drive portion (not shown) that drives the entry prevention movable portion 76k. Note that a drive section that drives the entry prevention movable section 76k is connected to the frame control board 180.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the entry prevention device 76. 60(A) is a front view of the game board 1, and FIG. 60(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 60(A) when the entry prevention device 76 is in a standby state. 60(C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 60(A) when the entry prevention device 76 is in an activated state.

As shown in FIGS. 60(A) and 60(B), the entry prevention movable part 76k is located at the end of the firing area 7 on the gaming area 6 side, in other words, between the gaming area 6 and the firing area 7 in the firing area 7. It is located near the border. The entry prevention movable part 76k is composed of a rectangular plate-shaped tongue member, and in the standby state, the long side direction is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the firing area 7, and the short side direction and the surface are parallel to the firing area 6 of the game ball. The entire long side direction other than the tip is housed behind the firing area 7 so that the tip is substantially perpendicular to the direction of movement toward the firing area 7 and so that the tip is smoothly flush with the firing area 7.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the launch area 7 on the game board 1 is divided by an inner rail 63 and an outer rail 62, and the length of the entry prevention movable part 76k in the short side direction is 7 and a length slightly shorter than the distance sandwiched between the inner rail 63 and the outer rail 62 at the installation position of the entry prevention movable part 76k in a cross section perpendicular to the launching direction of the game ball (direction toward the back of the page). has been done.

Furthermore, the entry prevention movable part 76k is configured to be able to move linearly in the front-rear direction, and when activated, it moves forward and projects vertically into the firing area 7, as shown in FIG. 60(C). Retained. When the entry prevention movable part 76k is held in the operating state, a game ball launched toward the game area 6 collides with the entry prevention movable part 76k, so that the game ball is prevented from entering the game area 6. Ru. In addition, when returning to the standby state in the entry prevention movable part 76k, it moves toward the rear.

The explanation returns to the game ball entry prevention process (S5207). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the entry prevention device 76 is in operation (S5802: YES), it directly ends the game ball entry prevention process (S5207). On the other hand, if the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the entry prevention device 76 is not in operation (NO in S5802), it puts the entry prevention device 76 into operation (S5803) and ends the game ball entry prevention process (S5207). .

To put the entry prevention device 76 into operation, the entry prevention movable part 76k, whose tip is flush with the game area 6 and whose entire long side except the tip is housed at the rear of the game area 6, is directed forward. It is to move and hold it in a protruding state. Further, in step S5803, the frame control microcomputer 181 turns on the entry prevention device activation flag in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184, which indicates that the entry prevention device 76 is in the activated state. Therefore, in step S5802, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether the entry prevention device activation flag is ON.

Note that the fact that it is determined in step S5802 that the intrusion prevention device 76 is not in operation means that the door open detection signal has changed from OFF to ON, in other words, the front door 23 has been opened from the closed state. It means that. Further, the fact that it is determined in step S5802 that the intrusion prevention device 76 is in operation means that the door open detection signal continues to be ON, in other words, the front door 23 continues to be opened. .

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the front door 23 is not open (NO in S5801), it determines whether the entry prevention device 76 is in operation, in other words, whether the entry prevention device activation flag is ON. It is determined whether or not (S5804). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the entry prevention device 76 is not in operation, in other words, the entry prevention device activation flag is not ON (NO in S5804), it directly executes the game ball entry prevention process (S5207). Finish. On the other hand, if the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the intrusion prevention device 76 is in operation, in other words, that the intrusion prevention device activation flag is ON (YES in S5804), it sets the intrusion prevention device 76 in a standby state. (S5805), the game ball entry prevention process (S5207) ends.

To put the intrusion prevention device 76 in a standby state means to move the intrusion prevention movable part 76k held in a state projected from the firing area 7 toward the rear so that the tip is flush with the firing area 7. The entire length of the other long side is stored behind the firing area 7. With the entry prevention device 76 returning to the standby state, the game balls fired toward the game area 6 can enter the game area 6. Note that the frame control microcomputer 181 turns off the entry prevention device activation flag in step S5805.

Note that the fact that it is determined that the intrusion prevention device 76 is in operation in step S5804 means that the door open detection signal has changed from ON to OFF, in other words, the front door 23 has changed from an open state to a closed state. It means that. Further, the fact that it is determined in step S5804 that the entry prevention device 76 is not in operation means that the front door open detection signal continues to be OFF, in other words, the front door 23 continues to be closed. .

Next, the electrical configuration of the production control board 120 side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained. FIG. 61 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration related to the production control board 120. As shown in FIG. 61, the production control board 120 is connected to the upper frame lamp 53U via the upper frame lamp driver board 162, is connected to the lower frame lamp 53D via the lower frame lamp driver board 163, and is connected to the lower frame lamp 53D via the lower frame lamp driver board 163. It is connected to the rotating member motor 55m1 and the lifting member motor 55m2 via the movable device driver board 164, and to the production button sensor 40a via the production button relay board 165.

Note that the upper frame lamp 53U, lower frame lamp 53D, and production button 40k are installed on the front door 23, and accordingly, the upper frame lamp driver board 162, the lower frame lamp driver board 163, and the production button relay are installed. A board 165 is also installed at a predetermined location on the front door 23. On the other hand, the board movable body 55k (elevating member 55k2 and rotating member 55k1) is installed on the game board 1, and the board moving device driver board 164 is also installed at a predetermined location on the game board 1 accordingly.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first effect button 40k is configured to be able to vibrate. Inside the protruding base 34, there is mounted a performance button motor 40m that serves as a drive source for vibrating the first performance button 40k. The effect button motor 40m is connected to the effect control board 120 via the effect button relay board 165.

Further, the upper frame lamp driver board 162 is equipped with an input/output port (upper frame lamp input/output port 162a) for inputting and outputting signals. Similarly, the lower frame lamp driver board 163 is also equipped with an input/output port (lower frame lamp input/output port 163a) for inputting and outputting signals. Further, the board moving device driver board 164 is also equipped with an input/output port (board moving device input/output port 164a) for inputting and outputting signals. Further, the production button relay board 165 is also equipped with an input/output port (production button input/output port 165a) for inputting and outputting signals.

The input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input/output port 164a for the board moving device, and the input/output port 165a for the production button are equipped with a large number of pins, and each input/output port 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a are set with information (address information) for specifying an address using the corresponding pin. Address information related to each input/output port 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a is composed of manufacturer identification information made up of upper 4 bits and device identification information made up of lower 3 bits.

The manufacturer identification information is information that identifies the manufacturer (company A in the first embodiment) of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the manufacturer identification information (upper frame lamp manufacturer identification information) set in the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a and the manufacturer identification information (lower frame lamp manufacturer identification information) set in the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a. information), the manufacturer identification information set in the board moving device input/output port 164a (board moving device manufacturer identification information), and the manufacturer identification information set in the production button input/output port 165a (performance button manufacturer identification information). information) is the same. On the other hand, the device identification information is information that identifies the device (apparatus) in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the device identification information (upper frame lamp device identification information) set in the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a and the device identification information (lower frame lamp device identification information) set in the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a information), the device identification information set in the board moving device input/output port 164a (board moving device device identification information), and the device identification information set in the production button input/output port 165a (performance button device identification information). information) are mutually different.

Although the specific content of each manufacturer identification information and each device identification information can be set as appropriate, in the first embodiment, the manufacturer identification information associated with the manufacturer (company A) of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is used. (Upper frame lamp manufacturer identification information, lower frame lamp manufacturer identification information, board moving device manufacturer identification information, presentation button device manufacturer identification information) are set to "1.0.1.0" from the uppermost side. In the first embodiment, as manufacturer identification information indicating a manufacturer of pachinko gaming machines different from company A, the manufacturer identification information associated with company B is "0, 0, 1, 0" from the upper level. The manufacturer identification information associated with company C is set to "0, 0, 0, 1" from the upper level, and the manufacturer identification information associated with company D is set to "0, 0, 1" from the upper level. 1.0.1". In this way, the manufacturer identification information representing each manufacturer is different from each other.

In addition, the upper frame lamp device identification information is set to "0, 0, 1" from the upper side, the lower frame lamp device identification information is set to "0, 1, 0" from the upper side, and the panel movable device device identification information are set to "1, 0, 0" from the upper order side, and the production button device identification information is set to "0, 1, 1" from the upper order side.

In addition, the production control board 120 is connected to an input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, an input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, an input/output port 164a for the panel moving device, and an input/output port 165a for the production button, and is connected to the production control board 120. A controller 128 is installed that functions as an interface between the microcomputer 121 and these input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a. Note that the controller 128 is composed of a microcomputer. Further, the controller 128 is connected to input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a through communication cables such as predetermined harnesses.

The controller 128 and the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input/output port 164a for the panel moving device, and the input/output port 165a for the production button can be connected by synchronous serial communication. The controller 128 is the master side, and the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, the panel moving device input/output port 164a, and the production button input/output port 165a are the slave side. It becomes. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, a clock is output from the master side to the slave side, and the master side transmits and receives data in synchronization with the clock.

Based on instructions from the production control microcomputer 121, the controller 128 operates an input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, an input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, an input/output port 164a for the panel moving device, and an input/output port for the production button. 165a, the upper frame lamp 53U, lower frame lamp 53D, rotating member motor 55m1 (rotating member 55k1), lifting member motor 55m2 (lifting member 55k2), and production button motor 40m. (First production button 40k) is activated.

When causing the upper frame lamp 53U to emit light, the controller 128 sends data to the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a including address information related to the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a and information indicating the light emission mode of the upper frame lamp 53U. Send. When the upper frame lamp driver board 162 receives the data including the address specifying information related to the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the upper frame lamp driver board 162 performs the following operations based on the information indicating the light emission mode of the upper frame lamp 53U included in the data. The upper frame lamp 53U is made to emit light.

When the controller 128 causes the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light, the controller 128 sends data to the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a including address information related to the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a and information indicating the light emission mode of the lower frame lamp 53D. Send. When the lower frame lamp driver board 163 receives data including address information related to the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, the lower frame lamp driver board 163 performs the lower frame lamp based on the information indicating the light emission mode of the lower frame lamp 53D included in the data. The frame lamp 53D is made to emit light.

When the controller 128 raises and lowers the lifting member 55k2 and rotates the rotating member 55k1, the controller 128 sends address information related to the board moving device input/output port 164a and the operation of the lifting member 55k2 to the board moving device input/output port 164a. Data including information indicating the mode (the operating mode of the lifting member motor 55m2) and the operating mode of the rotating member 55k1 (the operating mode of the rotating member motor 55m1) is transmitted. When the panel moving device driver board 164 receives data including address information related to the panel moving device input/output port 164a, it determines the operating mode of the elevating member 55k2 and the operating mode of the rotating member 55k1 included in the data. Based on the information shown, the lifting member 55k2 (lifting member motor 55m2) and the rotating member 55k1 (rotating member motor 55m1) are operated.

When the controller 128 vibrates the first performance button 40k, the controller 128 inputs address information related to the performance button input/output port 165a and the operation mode of the first performance button 40k (performance button motor 40m) to the performance button input/output port 165a. transmits data including information indicating the operating mode). When the production button relay board 165 receives data including address information related to the production button input/output port 165a, the production button relay board 165 determines the operation mode of the first production button 40k (operation mode of the production button motor 40m) included in the data. ), the first performance button 40k (performance button motor 40m) is operated.

Note that the controller 128 operates when causing the upper frame lamp 53U to emit light, when causing the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light, when operating the elevating member 55k2 (elevating member motor 55m2), and rotating member 55k1 (rotating member motor 55m1). , when vibrating the first performance button 40k (performance button motor 40m), data including address information related to various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, 165a is sent to various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, 165a. However, in the following, data including address information related to the various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a is transmitted to the various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a, even if it is not specifically mentioned. shall be.

In addition, when each of the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, the board moving device input/output port 164a, and the production button input/output port 165a receives data from the controller 128, A positive response is sent to the controller 128 by sending an ACK (ACKnowledge). The controller 128 connects each corresponding device (upper frame lamp 53U , the lower frame lamp 53D, the rotating member motor 55m1, the elevating member motor 55m2, and the production button motor 41m), whether an ACK (ACKnowledge) is received from the destination. Determine. If the controller 128 determines that it has not received an ACK from the destination, the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, the panel moving device input/output port 164a, and the production button Data (driver board transmission error data) indicating that a transmission error to the input/output port 165a has occurred is transmitted to the production CPU 122. The driver board transmission error signal only indicates that a transmission error has occurred to any of the input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, 165a, and does not indicate the type of input/output port in which the transmission error has occurred. In addition, when the controller 128 transmits the driver board transmission error data to the production CPU 122, the input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, where the transmission error occurred, are stored in a register (not shown) provided inside the controller 128. 165a is stored.

In the first embodiment, the speaker 52 is connected to the image CPU 141 via the audio control circuit 161, and the image CPU 141 performs control regarding the audio. Furthermore, data related to audio is stored in the image ROM 142. Furthermore, the production control board 120 is equipped with an RTC (Real Time Clock) 129 that can measure time.

Next, the production control main processing according to the first embodiment will be explained. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control main processing in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62, after the power-on process (S4001), the production control microcomputer 121 performs operation confirmation processing (S4002) regarding various production devices before disabling interruptions (S4003). Note that the step numbers for disabling interrupts in step S4003, updating the random number seed in step S4004, sending commands in step S4005, and enabling interrupts in step S4006 are different from those in the basic embodiment, but the control contents are basically the same. This is the same as the embodiment.

Here, the operation confirmation process (S4002) will be explained using FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of operation confirmation processing. As shown in FIG. 63, in the operation confirmation process, the production control microcomputer 121 first starts measuring the operation confirmation normality judgment time in step S4051. The operation confirmation normality judgment time is determined by the various operable production devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53 (upper frame lamp 53U, lower frame lamp 53D), board moving device 55, first production button device 40). This is the time required to determine that the operation is normal as a result of the operation check, and is composed of the elapsed time since the start of the operation check process. Although the specific time of the operation check normality determination time can be set as appropriate, it is set to 60 seconds in the first embodiment.

Note that while the operation check process (S4002) is being performed, the 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) described in the basic embodiment has not yet been executed, so the timer included in the 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) Since the update process (S4104) has not been executed yet, the production control microcomputer 121 appropriately measures the operation check normality determination time based on the RTC 129.

After the production control microcomputer 121 starts measuring the operation check normality judgment time, it controls various production devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamps 53 (upper frame lamp 53U, lower frame lamp 53D), board moving device 55, operation confirmation regarding the first performance button device 40) is sequentially executed (S4052 to S4057).

In step S4052, the performance control microcomputer 121 sends a command (image and audio operation check start command) indicating the contents of the operation check in order to check the operation of the image display device 50 and the speaker 52 (image and audio operation check). It is transmitted to the image control board 140.

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the image and audio operation check start command, it sends an operation check image (video) to the VDP 144 for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds) based on the image and audio operation check start command. ) is displayed on the display section 50a as appropriate. When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the image/audio operation confirmation start command, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 generates an operation confirmation voice for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds) based on the image/audio operation confirmation start command. The signal is output from the speaker 52 as appropriate via the control circuit 161.

In step S4053, the performance control microcomputer 121 sends a command (panel movable body operation check) indicating the operation confirmation contents in order to check the operation of the board movable device 55 (elevating member 55k2 and rotating member 55k1) (panel movable body operation check). A movable body operation check start command) is sent to the controller 128.

When the controller 128 receives the command to start confirming the operation of the movable panel, the controller 128 moves the elevating member 55k2 and the rotating member 55k1 for operation confirmation for a predetermined period of time (15 seconds) based on the command to start confirming the operation of the movable panel. The operation is caused to be performed by the board moving device 55 (the lifting member motor 55m2 and the rotating member motor 55m1) as appropriate.

In step S4054, the production control microcomputer 121 issues a command (frame A lamp operation check start command) is sent to the controller 128.

When the controller 128 receives the frame lamp operation check start command, the controller 128 appropriately controls the frame lamp 53 (upper frame lamp 53U and lower frame lamp 53D). Specifically, the controller 128 first causes the upper frame lamp 53U to emit light in a predetermined operation confirmation light emission mode, and then causes the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light in a predetermined operation confirmation light emission mode.

In step S4055, the production control microcomputer 121 issues a command (production button operation) indicating the content of the operation confirmation in order to confirm the operation (production button operation confirmation) of the first production button device 40 (first production button 40k). A confirmation start command) is sent to the controller 128.

Upon receiving the production button operation confirmation start command, the controller 128 appropriately starts the vibration of the first production button 40k for operation confirmation for a predetermined period of time (10 seconds) based on the production button operation confirmation start command. 1 effect button device 40 is executed.

In addition, in the slow chart of the operation confirmation process, it appears that image and audio operation confirmation, panel movable object operation confirmation, frame lamp operation confirmation, and production button operation confirmation can be performed sequentially, but this is because the start timing is in this order. In reality, they are started and running almost simultaneously.

After completing various operation checks, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the operation check normality determination time has elapsed in step S4056. If the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the operation confirmation normality determination time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4056. That is, the production control microcomputer 121 repeatedly performs step S4056 until it is determined that the operation confirmation normality determination time has elapsed. On the other hand, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the operation confirmation normality determination time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4057.

Here, as described above, when the controller 128 causes the upper frame lamp 53U and the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light, when operating the board movable body 55k (rotating member 55k1, elevating member 55k2), and when the first effect button When vibrating the 40k, each of the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, the panel moving device input/output port 164a, and the production button input/output port 165a receives data from the controller 128. When received, an ACK is sent to the controller 128, but if the controller 128 does not receive the ACK, the upper frame lamp 53U and lower frame lamp 53D corresponding to the input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a, and the panel movable The body 55k (rotating member 55k1, elevating member 55k2) and the first effect button 40k are not activated. Then, the controller 128 receives data for causing the upper frame lamp 53U to emit light, data for causing the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light, data for operating the panel movable body 55k (rotating member 55k1, elevating member 55k2), and data for causing the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light. 1. If data for vibrating the production button 40k is transmitted but no ACK is received in response to the transmission, data indicating that no ACK has been received from the input/output port is sent to the controller 128. stored in the register.

Therefore, in step S4057, the performance control microcomputer 121 checks the controller 128 and confirms the movement of the board movable body 55k (rotating member 55k1, elevating member 55k2), frame lamp operation, and performance button operation. ), the upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, and the first effect button 40k cannot be operated (abnormal operation error). When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that there is no abnormal operation error, it finishes the operation confirmation process and returns to the production control main process. On the other hand, if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that there is an abnormal operation error, the process proceeds to step S4058.

The production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not there is a frame mismatch error in step S4058. The frame mismatch error means that the combination of the front door 23 and the game board 1 is not compatible, that is, the game board 1 and the front door 23 are not aligned. Data indicating that ACK has not been received from all of the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, and the production button input/output port 165a installed on the front door 23 is stored. If data indicating that no ACK has been received from the board movable device input/output port 164a installed on the game board 1 is stored, it is determined that a frame mismatch error has occurred.

If ACK is not received from any part of the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, and the production button input/output port 165a, that input/output port is damaged or malfunctions. However, although the ACK is received from the input/output port 164a for the panel moving device, the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the direction If ACKs from all button input/output ports 165a are not received, the manufacturer identification information set in the input/output ports 162a, 163a, and 165a is replaced by the manufacturer identification information included in the data transmitted from the controller 128. It is considered that they do not match. This means that there is a high possibility that the front door 23 attached to the pachinko game machine PY1 is manufactured by another manufacturer.

When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that there is a frame incompatibility error in step S4058, it issues a frame incompatibility error notification to notify that a frame incompatibility error has occurred in step S4059. Although the display mode of the frame mismatch error notification can be set as appropriate, in the first embodiment, it is configured by displaying an image (frame mismatch error notification image) indicating that a frame mismatch error has occurred on the display unit 50a. ing. The specific display content of the frame mismatch error notification image can be set as appropriate within a range that allows the clerk at the game parlor to recognize that a frame mismatch error has occurred. It consists of an explanatory text that indicates that this has occurred: ``The front door may not be aligned properly. Please check.''

In step S4059, the effect control microcomputer 121 transmits a command (frame incompatibility error notification start command) indicating the effect content of the frame incompatibility error notification to the image control board 140. Upon receiving the frame mismatch error notification start command, the image control board 140 executes frame mismatch error notification based on the frame mismatch error notification start command. In the first embodiment, the image control board 140 displays a frame mismatch error notification image (explanation: "The front door may not match. Please check.") on the display unit 50a. Note that if some kind of image is displayed on the display unit 50a at the timing of starting the frame non-conformity error notification, even if the frame non-conformity error notification image is displayed superimposed on the image, the frame non-conformity error notification image is erased on the image and the frame non-conformity error notification image is displayed. An error notification image may also be displayed.

Further, if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines in step S4058 that there is no frame mismatch error, in step S4060, it issues an operation abnormality error notification according to the type of input/output port to which ACK has not been transmitted. Although the display mode of abnormal operation error notification can be set as appropriate, in the first embodiment, it is configured by displaying an image (an abnormal operation error notification image) on the display unit 50a indicating that an abnormal operation error has occurred. ing.

The specific display content of the abnormal operation error notification can be set as appropriate to the extent that the clerk at the game parlor can recognize that an abnormal operation error has occurred depending on the type of input/output port to which ACK has not been sent. Although this is possible, in the first embodiment, the explanation is composed of an explanatory text indicating that an abnormal operation error has occurred depending on the type of input/output port to which ACK has not been sent. For example, if ACK is not being sent only from the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the explanation will consist of "The upper frame lamp relationship is abnormal. Please check." If ACK is not being sent only from 163a, the explanation will consist of "There is an abnormality related to the lower frame lamp. Please check.", and if ACK is not being sent only from production button input/output port 165a. The explanation consists of "There is an abnormality related to the production button. Please check." In addition, if ACK is not sent from the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a and the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, the explanation is ``The relationship between the upper frame lamp and the lower frame lamp is abnormal.Please check. If ACK is not sent from the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp and the input/output port 165a for the effect button, the explanation will be ``The relationship between the lower frame lamp and the effect button is abnormal. Please check.", and if ACK is not sent from the production button input/output port 165a and the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the explanation is "The production button relationship and the upper frame lamp relationship are This is abnormal. Please check."

In step S4060, the performance control microcomputer 121 transmits a command (operation abnormality error notification start command) indicating the performance content of the abnormal operation error notification to the image control board 140. Upon receiving the abnormal operation error notification start command, the image control board 140 executes abnormal operation error notification based on the abnormal operation error notification start command.

Note that the production control microcomputer 121 does not proceed to any process after step S4059 and step S4060, and does not proceed to production control main processing. Therefore, it is not possible to perform a performance according to the game using the performance control board 120. This is to prevent the performance corresponding to the game from being executed in a state where an error related to the performance has occurred. Therefore, after this, for example, when the error is resolved by a clerk at the game parlor and the power is turned on again, it is determined in step S4057 that there is no abnormal operation error, and the process proceeds to the production control main process, and the The performance becomes possible. Furthermore, once the frame mismatch error notification and the abnormal operation error notification have been started, they will continue to be executed until the power is turned off. However, even if the frame mismatch error notification and/or malfunction error notification are configured to end when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start, they are configured to end when the first effect button 40k is operated. Also good.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the frame control board 180 (control means) that can execute control (predetermined control) regarding game balls, and the frame control RAM 184 (storage means) that can store predetermined data. ), the frame control RAM 184 (storage means) includes a number-of-balls-held storage section 185 (first storage section) and a number-of-balls-held BU section 186 (second storage section) on the frame control side, The storage unit 185 stores data representing the number of balls held (specific matters) as the number of balls held master data (main data), and the frame control side number of balls held BU unit 186 stores data representing the number of balls held (specific matters). The frame control board 180 stores three (multiple pieces) of the number of balls held by the frame control side BU data (sub data), and the frame control board 180 indicates that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal because the checksums related to the frame control RAM 184 do not match. If it is determined that the number of balls held by the three frame control side BU data all match (a predetermined condition is met), it is determined whether or not, and if it is determined that they all match, the three frame control side ball count BU data are Based on the ball count BU data held by the side, ball count master data is newly generated and stored in the ball count storage unit 185. Although the checksums related to the frame control RAM 184 do not match, the three frame control side ball count BU data all match, which means that the frame control side ball count BU unit 186 is maintained normally. There is a high possibility that there are. Then, by newly generating ball count master data using the frame control side ball count BU data, even if an abnormality occurs in any of the frame control RAMs 184 that store data representing the number of balls held, Even if there is, data representing the number of balls held can be generated to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

In addition, the frame control board 180 checks whether the checksums related to the frame control RAM 184 match in the power-on process (S5001) of the frame control main process that is performed when power is supplied to the frame control board 180. In other words, since it is determined whether or not the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage suffered by the player from increasing. Furthermore, since it is possible to secure data indicating the number of game balls that can be used in a game, called the number of balls held, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage. Furthermore, since it is a condition for newly generating the number of balls held master data that the frame control side held ball number BU data all match, the reliability of the ball held number master data can be increased.

Pachinko game machine PY1 includes a frame control board 180 (specific control means) that controls the number of balls held (predetermined matters) that can change according to the progress of the game, and a game control board 100 (non-specific control means) that is different from the frame control board 180. The frame control board 180 has a number of balls held storage unit 185 (specific storage unit) that stores ball held number master data (first data) representing the number of balls held, and the frame control board 180 has a game control side ball count BU unit 106 (non-specific storage unit) that stores game control side ball count BU data (second data) representing the number of balls held, and the frame control board 180 By updating the number master data (a predetermined condition is satisfied), a number-of-balls specification command (third data) representing the number of balls represented by the number-of-balls master data is sent to the game control board 100, and the game control board 100 When receiving the number-of-balls designation command, the game controller 100 updates the game control-side ball-number-BU data stored in the game-control-side ball-number-BU unit 106 based on the ball-number designation command. Therefore, the game control board 100 can also store data representing the number of balls held, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

In addition, when the frame control board 180 determines that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal because the checksums related to the frame control RAM 184 do not match, the frame control board 180 uses the ball count master data based on the ball count BU data on the game control side. may be newly generated and stored in the number of balls held storage unit 185. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage. Furthermore, the frame control board 180 determines whether the checksums related to the frame control RAM 184 match in the power-on process (S5001) of the frame control main process that is performed when power is supplied to the frame control board 180. In other words, it is determined whether the slot control RAM 184 is abnormal or not, and if it is abnormal, it immediately sends a held ball count data request command to the game control board 100, so there is no disadvantage to the player. Expansion can be suppressed. In addition, the frame control board 180 can update the ball count master data stored in the ball count storage unit 185 as the game progresses, and uses this update as a condition for transmitting the ball count designation command. Therefore, the reliability of the ball count BU data on the game control side can be increased.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a frame control board 180 (specific control means) that controls the number of balls held (the number of game media that a player can use in a game), and an image display device 50 (display means). In addition, the frame control board 180 has a frame control RAM 184 (specific storage unit) that stores master data on the number of balls held, which indicates the number of balls held, and the frame control board 180 has a frame control RAM 184 (specific storage unit) that stores the number of balls held master data indicating the number of balls held. If the frame control board 180 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the frame control RAM 184, the image display device 50 (display means) may determine whether the frame control RAM 184 has an abnormality. , the number of balls held can be displayed. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the slot control RAM 184, the clerk at the game parlor, the player, etc. can check the number of balls held, and the player can be prevented from suffering any disadvantage.

Furthermore, the image display device 50 displays the number of balls held on condition that the first production button 40k (operation means) is held down (predetermined operation), so the number of balls held can be displayed only when necessary. This improves convenience. Furthermore, since it is possible to accept a long press (predetermined operation) of the first production button 40k (operation means) during a period when no games are being played (predetermined period), it is possible to accept a long press (predetermined operation) of the first performance button 40k (operation means), so that the player's desire to play may be hindered. can be prevented from declining. In addition, since the image display device 50 displays the number of balls held based on the game control side ball number BU data that is updated as the game progresses, the number of balls held on the image display device 50 is reliable. You can increase your sexuality.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, a frame control board 180 (specific control means) that controls the number of balls held (the number of gaming media that a player can use in a game), and a number display device 301 (display The frame control board 180 includes a frame control RAM 184 (specific storage unit) that stores ball count master data (first count data) representing the number of balls held, and a ball count display device 301. has a display device side ball count BU unit 301d (non-specific storage unit) that stores display device side ball count BU data (second number data) representing the number of balls held; , it is possible to display the number of held balls indicated by the display device side held ball number BU data stored in the display device side held ball number BU section 301d. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the slot control RAM 184, the clerk at the game parlor, the player, etc. can check the number of balls held, and the player can be prevented from suffering any disadvantage.

In addition, by updating the number of balls master data (a predetermined condition is satisfied), the frame control board 180 has a number of balls update designation signal (specific data) representing the number of balls represented by the number of balls master data. When the ball count display device 301 receives the ball count update designation signal, the ball count display device 301 stores the signal in the ball count BU unit 301d on the display device side based on the ball count update designation signal. Update the ball count BU data on the display device side. The reliability of the ball count BU data on the display device side can be increased. In addition, the ball count master data can be updated as the game progresses, and this update is a condition for outputting the ball count update designation signal, so the reliability of the ball count BU data on the display device side is can be increased.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a is different when a steel game ball to which a magnet is attached passes the ejected ball detection sensor 310a and when a stainless steel game ball passes the ejected ball detection sensor 310a. The detection time (ejected bulb detection time) is different. Specifically, the ejected ball detection time is longer when the steel game ball to which the magnet is attached passes the ejected ball detection sensor 310a. The pachinko game machine PY1 is basically a game machine that plays games by letting stainless steel game balls flow down into the game area 6, and includes steel game balls that stick to magnets, and stainless steel game balls that stick to magnets. Equipped with an ejected ball detection sensor 310a (detection sensor) that detects balls and a frame control board 180, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet or a stainless steel game ball. The frame control board 180 outputs an ejected ball detection signal indicating the ejected ball detection signal to the frame control board 180, and when the ejected ball detection signal is input, the frame control board 180 measures the time during which the ejected ball detection signal is input. Therefore, it can be recognized that the steel game ball to which the magnet is attached has been ejected outside the game area 6 as a discharged ball. In addition, if the ejected ball detection signal is input for a longer time than the illegally specified time (12 ms), the frame control board 180 issues an unauthorized notification (indicating that a steel game ball that sticks to the magnet has been detected). Since a specific notification is carried out, the game parlor can be made aware that steel game balls that stick to magnets have been mixed in. In addition, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a is installed in a recovery path formed outside the gaming area 6 through which the gaming balls that have entered the gaming area 6 can be collected and passed through. The detection performance is improved.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a gaming machine in which a gaming area 6 through which the fired gaming balls can flow down and a firing area 7 through which the fired gaming balls can pass to head toward the gaming area 6 are formed. The launch area 7 is provided with an entry prevention movable part 76k (movable part) that can be switched between a standby state and an active state, and the entry prevention movable part 76k is a game player that moves toward the game area 6 in the standby state. It allows the ball to pass through, but does not allow the game ball moving toward the game area 6 to pass through in the operating state. Therefore, when the front door 23 is open, it is possible to prevent the game balls from entering the game area 6 and rolling around, and from jumping out of the pachinko game machine PY1. can.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 further includes a firing device 72 (launching means) that fires game balls, and between the firing device 72 and the entry prevention movable part 76k, there is a part that moves toward the firing device 72 from the gaming area 6 side. Since a foul ball collection port (collection port) is formed to collect moving game balls as foul balls, entry into the game area 6 is prevented by the entry prevention movable part 76k and the balls move toward the firing device 72. (Back) Game balls can be collected directly as foul balls. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent game balls from flying out of the pachinko game machine PY1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a frame-shaped inner frame 22, a game board 1 in which a gaming area 6 is formed and is fitted into an opening 1A (fitting hole) formed in the inner frame, The firing device 72 is installed in the inner frame 22, the firing device 72 is formed across the inner frame 22 and the game board 1, and the entry prevention movable part 76k is a part formed in the inner frame 22 of the firing area 7. It is arranged near the boundary between the inner frame 22 and the game board 1. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent game balls from flying out of the pachinko game machine PY1. Furthermore, it further includes a front door 23 supported by the inner frame 22 so as to be openable and closable on the front side of the game area 6 and the firing area 7, and the entry prevention movable part 76k is configured to: Switches from standby state to active state. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent game balls from flying out of the pachinko game machine PY1.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a front door 23 that is supported in an openable and closable manner on the front side of the gaming area 6 through which the ejected game balls can flow down, and a door open detection sensor that detects when the front door 23 is opened. 23a (detection means), when the opening of the front door 23 is not detected by the door open detection sensor 23a, the game ball is allowed to enter the gaming area 6, and the door open detection sensor When the opening of the front door 23 is detected by 23a, the game ball is prevented from entering the game area 6. Therefore, when the front door 23 is open, game balls can be prevented from flying out to the outside of the pachinko game machine PY1.

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY1, a firing area 7 is formed downstream of the gaming area 6 with respect to the firing of the game ball, and a firing area 7 through which the game ball can pass toward the gaming area 6 is detected by the door open detection sensor 23a. When the opening of the front door 23 is not detected, the opening of the front door 23 is detected by the door opening detection sensor 23a, allowing the game balls moving toward the gaming area 6 in the firing area to enter the gaming area 6. When detected, the game balls moving toward the game area 6 in the firing area 7 are prevented from entering the game area 6. Therefore, when the front door 23 is open, it is possible to further prevent game balls from flying out to the outside of the pachinko game machine PY1. In addition, in the launch area 7, an entry prevention movable part 76k that can be switched between a standby state in which a game ball moving toward the game area 6 passes through, and an operating state in which a game ball moving toward the game area 6 does not pass through. The entry prevention movable part 76k is normally held in a standby state, and switches from the standby state to the operating state when the door opening detection sensor 23a detects the opening of the front door 23, so that the pachinko ball of the game ball is It is possible to more reliably prevent the gaming machine PY1 from flying out.

Further, the pachinko game machine PY1 is a game machine equipped with a front door 23 that is supported in an openable and closable manner on the front side of the game area 6 through which the ejected game balls can flow down. A lock 302 capable of keeping the door 23 closed and releasing the closure is provided, and an unlock detection sensor 302a (detection means) for detecting release of the closure by the lock 302 is provided. When the release of the closure is not detected by the unlock detection sensor 302a, the game balls are allowed to be launched, and when the release of the closure is detected by the unlock detection sensor 302a, the game balls are prevented from being launched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from flying out of the pachinko game machine PY1. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 further includes a firing device 72 (launching means) capable of executing an operation of firing a game ball, and when release of the lock is not detected by the unlock detection sensor 302a, the firing device 72 The firing device 72 is maintained in a state in which it can perform an action of firing a ball, and when the release of the lock is detected by the unlock detection sensor 302a, the firing device 72 is held in a state in which it cannot perform an action in which it fires a game ball. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent game balls from flying out of the pachinko game machine PY1.

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 has input/output ports having multiple terminals (input/output port 162a for upper frame lamp, input/output port 163a for lower frame lamp, input/output port 164a for board moving device, input/output port 164a for production button, A game machine equipped with a board (an upper frame lamp driver board 162, a lower frame lamp driver board 163, and a production button relay board 165) on which an output port 165a) is mounted, and one of the plurality of terminals. An address related to the input/output port is set by a plurality of terminals of the unit, and the address includes specific unique information (manufacturer identification information) representing a predetermined attribute. Therefore, by identifying the attributes of the pachinko game machine PY1 using the board on which the input/output port is mounted, it is possible to investigate whether or not there is any fraud on the pachinko game machine PY1. can prevent them from being disadvantaged. Moreover, since the predetermined attribute is the company that manufactured the pachinko game machine PY1, the manufacturing company also has the advantage of being able to easily carry out development.

Further, the pachinko game machine PY1 further includes a game board 1, a front door 23 that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the game board 1, and a performance control board 120 (control means), and a board (upper frame lamp driver). The board 162, the lower frame lamp driver board 163, and the effect button relay board 165) are installed on the front door 23, the effect control board 120 is installed on the game board 1, and the effect control board 120 has a board representing predetermined attributes. Basic unique information (manufacturer identification information) is stored, and if the predetermined attribute represented by the basic unique information and the predetermined attribute represented by the specific unique information are different, the production control board 120 A specific notification (frame mismatch error notification) indicating that the combination of the front door 23 and the game board 1 is not compatible can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the front door 23 on which the performance device is mounted is incorrectly attached to the game board 1. This is particularly effective when, for example, there are various manufacturers of the game board 1, but the manufacturer of the front door 23 is different from the manufacturer of the game board 1, and the same manufacturer. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is equipped with a plurality of boards (upper frame lamp driver board 162, lower frame lamp driver board 163, and production button relay board 165), and the address contains specific unique information and each board. Since individual information (device identification information) associated with each board is included, the boards can be easily identified from each other based on the address.

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a firing device (launching device 72) that fires game balls, control regarding the firing of game balls by the firing device, and predetermined matters other than firing game balls (number of balls held, false notification, etc.). a control means (frame control board 180) that performs control related to the game ball, and the control means is capable of executing unit control (unit firing control) regarding firing of one game ball at a predetermined period (600 msec), The unit control consists of firing a game ball and a firing standby in which the game ball is not fired until the next game ball is fired after the firing. Therefore, the control means for controlling the firing of game balls can be general-purposed, and the space and cost of the control means for firing the game balls can be reduced, and the number of game balls fired per unit time can be reduced. can be adjusted appropriately. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1, depending on the end of unit control, a firing delay (launching cycle change control) in which game balls are not fired, which is different from firing standby, may be executed. The number of game balls to be fired can be adjusted more appropriately. Moreover, since the time involved in the firing delay (launch cycle change control) is shorter than the time associated with the predetermined cycle related to unit control, the number of game balls fired per unit time will be reduced, which will put the game parlor at a disadvantage. can be prevented.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, control can be executed at a predetermined minimum time interval (every 4 msec), and the time (4 msec) related to firing delay (firing cycle change control) and the predetermined cycle related to unit control. Since this time (600 msec) can be divided by the time interval (minimum time interval) of the control, control regarding the shooting of game balls by the frame control board 180 becomes easy.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the frame control board 180 can periodically (every 2404 msec) perform specific control (unit launch control) related to the launch of game balls multiple times, and in each specific control, at least This includes two or more first (four) unit controls and a second (one) firing delay (firing cycle change control). Therefore, it is possible to easily control the number of game balls fired per unit time by the frame control board 180. In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 further includes an operating means (launching handle 72k) capable of accepting a specific operation (rotation operation) to launch a game ball, and the firing device launches the game ball in accordance with the specific operation received by the operating means. The control means can periodically execute the specific control on the condition that the specific operation is accepted. Therefore, even when the player performs an operation related to firing, the number of game balls fired per unit time can be easily and appropriately adjusted.

The pachinko game machine PY1 also includes a firing device 72 that fires game balls, and a frame control board 180 (control means) that controls predetermined matters including the firing of game balls by the firing device 72. 180 is capable of executing control at 4 msec intervals (predetermined time intervals), and controls 4 (n ) is possible to execute unit firing control (specific unit firing control) that causes the firing device 72 to fire the game balls of 1 (1 or more) every 4 msec between one unit firing control and the next unit firing control. 4 m seconds (second specific period) multiplied by the second integer of Therefore, the number of game balls fired per unit time can be appropriately adjusted by the control by the frame control board 180.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the first embodiment, the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec, but the time related to this cycle is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. Therefore, even if the timer interrupt processing on the frame control side (S5005) is executed at a cycle shorter than a 4ms cycle, such as a 1ms cycle or a 2ms cycle, the timer interrupt process (S5005) is shorter than a 4ms cycle, such as a 6ms cycle or a 10ms cycle. It may be executed in long time cycles. Further, regarding the control related to the firing of game balls according to the first embodiment, specifically, the unit firing control and the unit firing control may also be changed as appropriate. Further, the number of game balls fired per unit time may be changed as appropriate.

For example, when frame control side timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 4 msec, unit firing control is performed to fire one game ball every 600 msec, and unit firing control is configured with one unit firing control. The time interval between controls may be set to 4 msec, and the number of game balls fired per unit time may be approximately 99.338. In addition, when the frame control side timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 4 msec, unit firing control is performed to fire one game ball every 600 msec, and the unit firing control is configured with 16 unit firing controls, and the unit In the firing control, a time period of 12 ms is secured that does not constitute unit firing control, in other words, the firing delay (firing cycle change control) after unit firing control is performed three times, and the firing of game balls per unit time is ensured. The number may be approximately 99.875. In this case, the allocation for the three firing delays (firing cycle change control) in the unit firing control may be set as appropriate. For example, one firing delay (firing cycle change control) is performed for the 5th unit firing control, the 10th unit firing control, and the 16th unit firing control. ) may be arranged as evenly as possible. Alternatively, three firing delays (firing period change control) may be performed continuously in the 16th unit firing control, and the firing delays (firing period changing control) may be arranged together in the unit firing control. .

In addition, the timer interrupt processing on the frame control side is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, unit firing control is performed to fire one game ball every 600 msec, and the unit firing control is configured with two unit firing controls. The time interval may be set to 2 msec, and the number of game balls fired per unit time may be approximately 99.834. In addition, the frame control side timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, unit firing control is performed to fire one game ball in 600 msec, and the unit firing control is configured with 8 unit firing controls. In this case, a time period of 6 ms is ensured in which unit firing control is not performed, in other words, the firing delay (firing cycle change control) after unit firing control is performed three times, and the number of game balls fired per unit time is It may be set to approximately 99.875. In this case, the allocation for the three firing delays (firing cycle change control) in the unit firing control may be set as appropriate. For example, one firing delay (firing period change control) is performed for the second unit firing control, the fifth unit firing control, and the eighth unit firing control, and one firing delay (firing period changing control) is performed in the unit firing control. ) may be arranged as evenly as possible. Alternatively, three firing delays (firing period change control) may be performed consecutively in the eighth unit firing control, and the firing delays (firing period changing control) may be arranged together in the unit firing control. .

Further, in the first embodiment, in the frame control board 180, the frame control side held ball number BU unit 186 is formed in the frame control RAM 184 including the held balls number storage unit 185; It may also be formed in a separate storage device (component, electronic medium). Further, in the first embodiment, the frame control side number of balls held BU section 186 includes a first number of balls held BU area 186a, a second number of balls held BU area 186b, and a third number of balls held BU area 186c, and three Although the backup data representing the number of balls held is stored, the number of stored backup data representing the number of balls held is not limited to three, and may be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of balls held by the first frame control side ball count BU data, the number of balls held by the second frame control side ball count BU data, and the number of balls held by the third frame control side BU. If all of the numbers of balls represented by the data match, it is determined that the backup data representing the number of balls held in the frame control board 180 is normal, but this is the criterion for determining whether or not it is normal. It is not limited to , and may be changed as appropriate. For example, if the backup data indicating the number of balls held in the frame control board 180 matches more than half of the number of balls held, or a predetermined ratio of more than half, such as 2/3 or more, the number of balls held in the frame control board 180 matches. It may be determined that the backup data representing the above is normal. In this case, the number of balls that match at a predetermined ratio of half or more may be restored as the number of balls master data (newly stored in the ball number storage section 185).

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the power-on process (S5001) of the frame control main process, if it is determined that the checksum values do not match, in other words, that an abnormality has occurred in the frame control RAM 184, the frame control side The ball count master data is restored using the ball count BU data (newly stored in the ball count storage unit 185), but the frame control board 180 is not provided with the frame control side ball count BU unit 186. The number of balls held by the control side BU data is not stored, and the number of balls held by the game control side BU data and the number of balls held by the display device side, or both, are used to master the number of balls held from the beginning. The data may be restored (newly stored in the number of balls held storage unit 185). When using either one, the number of balls represented by the number of balls BU data may be restored as the number of balls master data (newly stored in the ball number storage section 185). On the other hand, when both are used, it is determined whether the number of balls represented by the game control side ball number BU data and the number of balls represented by the display device side ball number BU data match, and it is determined that they match. Then, assuming that these values are normal, the matched ball count may be restored as the ball count master data (newly stored in the ball count storage unit 185).

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of balls held by the first frame control side ball count BU data, the number of balls held by the second frame control side ball count BU data, and the number of balls held by the third frame control side BU. If the number of balls represented by the data does not all match and the frame control side number of balls BU section 186 determines that there is an abnormality, the game is not being played and the first effect button 40k is When the condition of receiving one specific operation (for example, a long press operation for 5 seconds) is satisfied, the number of balls held is displayed on the display section 50a. However, this condition can be changed as appropriate. For example, when a game is not being played, a menu screen showing various settings such as volume and light intensity is displayed, and it includes a menu specifying that the number of balls held is displayed, and that menu is selected. The number of balls held may be displayed on the display section 50a on the condition that the operation is performed. Further, the number of balls held may be displayed on the display section 50a on the condition that no game is being played, regardless of whether or not the first performance button 40k is operated. Alternatively, the number of balls held may be displayed on the display section 50a on the condition that the first performance button 40k receives the first specific operation, regardless of whether or not a game is being played. Furthermore, the content of the first specific operation may also be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the number of balls held is displayed on the display unit 50a, the first effect button 40k receives the second specific operation (for example, one normal press operation), so that the display Although the number of balls held is deleted in the section 50a, the content of the second specifying operation may be changed as appropriate. Alternatively, after the number of balls held is displayed on the display section 50a, the number of balls held is erased after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the display, regardless of whether or not the first effect button 40k is operated. You can do it like this. Further, the number of balls held may continue to be displayed until the game starts.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the ball count display button 301k is operated, the ball count display device 301 displays the number of balls held on the ball count display 301b. If it is not installed and power is supplied, the number of balls held may continue to be displayed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in response to the updated ball count master data, the frame control side ball count BU data, the game control side ball count BU data, and the display device side ball count BU data are also updated. This update timing may be changed as appropriate. For example, every time the frame control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the frame control side ball count backup process, the game control side ball count backup process, and the display device side backup process are executed, and various ball count BU data are updated. It is also possible to do so.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, based on the ejected ball detection signal from the ejected ball detection sensor 310a installed in the collection path formed outside the gaming area 6, steel game balls that stick to the magnet are mixed. However, the installation position of the detection sensor for determining whether a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet is mixed in may be changed as appropriate. For example, a detection sensor that detects steel game balls that stick to magnets and stainless steel game balls that stick to magnets is installed in the firing area 7, and based on the detection signal output from the detection sensor, steel game balls that stick to magnets are detected. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not it is mixed. In addition, the first embodiment also includes the specific time of the fraudulently specified time, which is a comparison target for the ejected ball detection time and is a reference value (threshold value) for determining whether steel game balls that stick to magnets are mixed in. It is not limited and may be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, although the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is equipped with an intrusion prevention device 76, the shape, operation mode, and installation location of the intrusion prevention movable portion 76k that constitutes the intrusion prevention device 76 are such that the intrusion prevention movable portion 76k is in a standby state. You may change it as appropriate within the range that allows the game ball to pass through without any problem and prevents the game ball moving toward the game area 6 from entering the game area 6 in the activated state. For example, the rectangular flat plate-shaped entry prevention movable part 76k is arranged so that its surface is flush with the firing area 7 in the standby state and the long side direction is parallel to the moving direction of the game ball, and in the operating state. Then, it may be configured such that the end on the side of the firing device 72 is used as a rotation axis and the tip on the side of the game area 6 rotates so as to rise.

Furthermore, a part (for example, about 1 to 2 cm) of the outer rail 62 that partitions the firing area 7 is constructed of a movable part made of a separate part while maintaining the shape of the part, and the movable part is not operated. In this state, the end portion on the side of the firing device 72 may be used as a rotation axis, and the tip on the side of the game area 6 may be configured to rotate so as to be tilted toward the inner rail 63 side. Alternatively, a part (for example, about 1 to 2 cm) of the inner rail 63 that partitions the firing area 7 may be configured as a movable part made of another part while maintaining the shape of the part, and the movable part may be in the operating state. In this case, the end portion on the side of the firing device 72 may be used as a rotation axis, and the tip portion on the side of the game area 6 may be configured to rotate so as to be tilted toward the outer rail 62 side.

Further, in the first embodiment, the entry prevention movable part 76k is arranged at the end of the launch area 7 on the game area 6 side, in other words, near the boundary between the game area 6 and the launch area 7 in the launch area 7. , the range from the foul ball collection port in the firing area 7 to the gaming area 6 side may be changed as appropriate. For example, the entry prevention movable part 76k may be arranged around the center of the part of the firing area 7 formed on the game board 1 along the moving direction of the game ball. Alternatively, the entry prevention movable part 76k may be arranged in a portion formed in the inner frame 22 of the firing area 7, near the boundary between the inner frame 22 and the game board 1, in other words, at the end on the side of the game area 6. .

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the entry prevention movable part 76k switches from the standby state to the operating state when the front door 23 is opened, and prevents the game balls moving toward the game area 6 from passing through. This timing may be changed as appropriate within a range that prevents the game balls moving toward the game area 6 from passing through. For example, even if the front door 23 is not open, when the lock 302 is unlocked, the entry prevention movable part 76k may be switched from the standby state to the operating state. Alternatively, even if the front door 23 is not opened, the entry prevention movable part 76k may be configured to switch from the standby state to the operating state when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the lock 302 was unlocked. good.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the lock 302 is unlocked, the firing device 72 is prohibited from firing the game balls, but this timing is different from when the front door 23 is opened toward the game area 6. It may be changed as appropriate within the range that can prevent the moving game balls from coming out of the pachinko game machine PY1. For example, when the front door 23 is opened, the firing device 72 may be prohibited from firing game balls. Alternatively, the firing device 72 may be prohibited from firing the game ball when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the lock 302 was unlocked. In addition, in the first embodiment, the frame control microcomputer 181 turns on the firing prohibition flag, and while the firing prohibition flag is ON, the process for firing the game ball (S5409) cannot be reached. Although the firing of the ball is prohibited, the method of prohibiting this can be changed as appropriate. For example, the detection signal from the touch switch 72a or the detection signal from the firing volume knob 72b may be disabled or disabled. This may prohibit the firing of game balls. Alternatively, the firing handle 72k may be fixed at the initial position, or the firing device 72 may become inoperable, thereby prohibiting the firing of game balls.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the game board 1 and It has been determined whether alignment with the front door 23 is achieved, but any one of the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, and the production button input/output port 165a Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are matched based on the manufacturer identification information set in any two. However, when making a determination based on one manufacturer identification information, there is a possibility that a single input/output port has failed, so it is preferable to have at least two input/output ports involved in the determination. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of improving the accuracy of determining whether there is a failure in the input/output port or whether the game board 1 and the front door 23 are not aligned, it is preferable to increase the number of input/output ports involved in the determination.

Furthermore, the front door 23 is equipped with a board that controls the speaker 52 attached to the front door 23, and the input/output ports of the board are set with address information including manufacturer identification information and device information. , instead of any one or two of the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, and the production button input/output port 165a, or the upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, the lower frame lamp input/output port 162a, and the lower frame lamp input/output port 163a. In addition to the frame lamp input/output port 163a and the production button input/output port 165a, the input/output port related to the speaker 52 is also used to determine whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are aligned. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, a presentation device different from the speaker 52, the upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, and the first presentation button 40k, such as a movable device operable like the panel moving device 55, is attached to the front door 23, and the presentation device is activated. Address information including manufacturer identification information and device information is set in the input/output ports mounted on the control board, and the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the production button In place of any one or two of the input/output ports 165a for the production, or in addition to the input/output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input/output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the input/output port 165a for the production button, the production It may also be determined whether the game board 1 and the front door 23 are aligned using the input/output ports of the device.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the address information set to the input/output ports 162a, 163a, and 165a includes manufacturer identification information for determining whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are matched. However, in place of or in addition to the manufacturer identification information that identifies the manufacturer, identification information that identifies the model (model identification information) or identification information that identifies the series related to the model (model series identification information) may be used. It may be included in the address information. In this way, by including the model identification information and model series identification information in the address information, it is possible to determine whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are matched, even for pachinko gaming machines made by the same manufacturer. can do.

Further, in the first embodiment, the controller 128 is mounted as a separate component from the production control microcomputer 121 on the production control board 120, but it may be configured to be built into the production control microcomputer 121. Further, although the controller 128 and the various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a are connected by serial communication, they may be connected by parallel communication. Further, in the first embodiment, the various input/output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a transmit ACK to the controller 128 when receiving data, but the specifications may be such that they do not transmit ACK. In this case, the controller 128 may be configured to be able to detect transmission errors using a predetermined method.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment according to the present invention will be described. Below, as a second embodiment, the basic embodiment and points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configurations as the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 and frame control board 180 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko game machine PY2 of the second embodiment uses an irregular ball detection sensor as a sensor that directly detects game balls that contain more iron than stainless steel game balls and stick to magnets. 313a is installed. As mentioned above, fraud may be committed using game balls that contain more iron than stainless steel balls, but the fraudulent ball detection sensor 313a does not detect stainless steel game balls and It also contains a lot of iron and is configured to be able to detect game balls that stick to magnets. In the following, a game ball that contains more iron than a stainless steel game ball and sticks to a magnet will be referred to as an "illegal ball."

The illegal ball detection sensor 313a is provided in a collection path (not shown) near the downstream side of the discharged ball detection sensor 310a. When the illegal ball detection sensor 313a detects an illegal ball, it outputs a signal indicating that an illegal ball has been detected (an illegal ball detection signal) to the frame control board 180.

Next, frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) according to the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of frame control side timer interrupt processing. As shown in FIG. 65, in steps S5201 to S5208, the same subroutine processing as in the first embodiment is performed. However, as will be described later, the control details of the fraud detection process in step S5206 are different from the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment, in step S5209, differential pitch count management processing, which is not performed in the first embodiment, is performed. The difference ball count management process manages the difference (difference number of balls) between the number of game balls that have entered the game area 6 (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls that have been ejected from the game area 6 (number of ejected balls). This is the process to do so. Note that the other processing in step S5210 in the second embodiment is the same control content as the other processing in step S5209 in the first embodiment.

Next, fraud detection processing (S5206) according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of fraud detection processing (S5206). As shown in FIG. 66, in the fraud detection process (S5206), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not there was an irregular ball, in other words, whether or not the irregular ball detection signal from the irregular ball detection sensor 313a was input. (S5601).

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no illegal ball (NO in S5601), it immediately ends the fraud detection process (S5206), and if it determines that there is an illegal ball (YES in S5601), it performs the above-mentioned process in step S5602. Similarly, fraud notification is performed, and the fraud detection process (S5206) ends. The content of the presentation of fraud notification can be set as appropriate within a range that allows recognition of the occurrence of fraud, but the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a was provided in the collection path, but since the ejected ball detection sensor 310a can detect not only illegal balls but also stainless steel game balls, It was necessary to detect a fraudulent ball by controlling the fraud detection process (FIG. 58). However, in the second embodiment, since the illegal ball detection sensor 313a that detects illegal balls without detecting stainless steel game balls is provided in the collection path, it depends on whether or not the illegal ball detection sensor 313a has detected the illegal balls. It is possible to directly determine whether or not an illegal ball exists.

Next, the differential pitch count management process (S5209) according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the differential pitch count management process (S5209). Note that the number of balls held storage unit 185 is provided with a number of difference pitches counter for counting the number of difference balls, and the performance control microcomputer 121 manages the number of difference balls using the number of difference balls counter. Therefore, if no fraud has been committed, the counter value of the differential pitch counter indicates the number of differential pitches at that time. In addition, the difference in number of pitches indicates "+" when the number of entering pitches is greater than the number of exiting pitches and "-" when the number of entering balls is less than the number of exiting pitches in a situation where no fraud is committed. show.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the difference pitch number management process (S5209), the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not there is a shot ball in step S5901. As described above, when a shot ball is generated, the shot ball detection sensor 311a outputs a shot ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, in step S5901, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether a shot ball detection signal has been input.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no shot ball (NO in S5901), the process directly proceeds to step S5903, and if it determines that there is a shot ball (YES in S5901), it sets the counter value of the difference ball counter in step S5902. By adding "1" to "1", "1" is added to the number of difference pitches to be managed, and the process advances to step S5903. The reason why it is determined that there is a shot ball and the difference ball count is incremented by "1" is because if a game ball is shot, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the game area 6.

The performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether there is a foul ball in step S5903. As described above, when a foul ball occurs, the foul ball detection sensor 312a outputs a foul ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5903 whether or not a foul ball detection signal has been input.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no foul ball (NO in S5903), the process directly proceeds to step S5905, and if it determines that there is a foul ball (YES in S5903), it sets the counter value of the difference pitch counter in step S5904. By subtracting "1" from "1", the number of difference pitches to be managed is subtracted by "1", and the process proceeds to step S5905. The reason why it is determined that there was a foul ball and the difference ball count is subtracted by 1 is because the game ball was fired and the difference ball count was added by 1, but it did not enter the game area 6 and was fouled. This is because since it was recovered as a ball, the addition of "1" needs to be canceled.

The performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not there is an ejected ball in step S5905. As described above, when an ejected ball is generated, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a outputs an ejected ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, in step S5905, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether an ejected ball detection signal has been input.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there are no ejected balls (NO in S5905), the process directly proceeds to step S5907, and if it determines that there are ejected balls (YES in S5905), it sets the counter value of the difference ball number counter in step S5906. By subtracting "1" from "1", the number of difference pitches to be managed is subtracted by "1", and the process advances to step S5907. The reason why it is determined that there is an ejected ball and the difference ball count is subtracted by "1" is because the game ball that entered the game area 6 was ejected from the game area 6.

The performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether there is an illegal ball in step S5907. As described above, when an irregular ball occurs, the irregular ball detection sensor 313a outputs an irregular ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether an irregular ball detection signal has been input in step S5907.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no illegal ball (NO in S5907), the process directly proceeds to step S5909, and if it determines that there is an illegal ball (YES in S5907), it sets the counter value of the difference ball counter in step S5908. By adding "1" to "1", the number of difference pitches to be managed is added by "1", and the process advances to step S5909. The reason why it is determined that there is an illegal ball and the difference ball count is added by 1 is because an illegal ball was detected, which means that a game ball different from the game balls that are legitimately circulating in the pachinko machine PY2 is detected. This is to cancel the ball thrown into the pachinko game machine PY2 and counted as an ejected ball.

In step S5909, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the number of pitch differences is greater than a predetermined excessive threshold (for example, +30). The predetermined excess threshold value (for example, +30) indicates that the game ball that has entered the game area 6 can remain in the game area 6 if it is normally ejected from the game area 6, even though the game ball continues to be normally launched. It is set to a value that moderately exceeds the number of game balls, and can be set as appropriate within a range that can appropriately indicate this. The difference in the number of balls exceeding a predetermined excessive threshold value means that a large number of game balls are stuck in a nail or the like, or that the front door 23 is opened and the game balls go outside of the pachinko machine PY2. It is assumed that a situation has arisen in which the amount of people who left is not returned.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the difference pitch count does not exceed a predetermined excess threshold (NO in S5909), it immediately finishes the difference pitch count management process (S5209) and proceeds to the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005). Returning, if it is determined that the number of differential pitches exceeds the predetermined excess threshold (YES in S5909), in step S5910, a differential pitch count abnormality notification is sent to notify that the differential pitch count is abnormal (difference pitch count abnormality error). After performing this, the difference pitch count management process (S5209) is completed, and the process returns to the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005).

The difference pitch count abnormality notification in step S5910 is performed by displaying on the display unit 50a an image indicating that the difference pitch count abnormality has occurred. Since the frame control board 180 and the production control board 120 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 displays an image indicating that an abnormal pitch difference has occurred (a difference pitch abnormality notification image) on the display unit 50a. A difference pitch count abnormality notification request command is set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 for requesting that the difference pitch count abnormality notification be displayed (execute the difference pitch count abnormality notification). The difference pitch count abnormality notification request command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the game control board 100 by output processing (S5003). When the game control microcomputer 101 receives the differential pitch count abnormality notification request command, it transmits a differential pitch count abnormality notification designation command to the production control board 120, which designates execution of differential pitch count abnormality notification. When the production control microcomputer 121 receives the differential pitch count abnormality notification designation command, it transmits a command (difference pitch count abnormality notification start command) indicating that the differential pitch count abnormality notification is to be executed to the image control board 140.

When the image control board 140 receives the difference pitch count abnormality notification start command, it displays the difference pitch count abnormality notification image on the display unit 50a for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). Note that the specific display content of the differential pitch count abnormality notification image can be set as appropriate within a range that allows recognition that the differential pitch count abnormality has occurred. It consists of an explanatory text that indicates that a problem has occurred, ``The number of differential pitches is abnormal. Please cancel.''

As described above, the pachinko game machine PY2 is a game machine that plays games by letting stainless steel game balls flow down into the game area 6, and detects steel game balls that stick to magnets. Equipped with an illegal ball detection sensor 313a (specific detection sensor) that does not detect game balls, and a frame control board 180 (control means), the illegal ball detection sensor 313a detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet. The frame control board 180 can output a fraudulent ball detection signal (specific detection signal) shown in FIG. Therefore, in a specification in which games are basically played by letting stainless steel game balls flow down into the game area 6, the game parlor is notified by simple control that steel game balls that stick to magnets are mixed in. can do. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY2 further includes an ejected ball detection sensor 310a (non-specific detection sensor) that detects steel game balls that stick to a magnet and stainless steel game balls. When a sticking steel game ball or stainless steel game ball is detected, an ejected ball detection signal (non-specific detection signal) indicating the detection is output to the frame control board 180, and the frame control board 180 detects the ejected ball. Based on the input of the signal, control regarding the number of differential pitches (predetermined matters related to game balls) can be executed. Therefore, while monitoring whether steel game balls that stick to magnets are mixed in, predetermined matters regarding the game balls, specifically, control regarding the number of different balls, can be executed to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY2, the illegal ball detection sensor 313a and the ejected ball detection sensor 310a are installed close to each other near a specific location through which game balls can pass, so they are made of steel that accurately sticks to the magnet. While monitoring whether game balls are mixed in, predetermined matters regarding game balls, specifically, control regarding the number of difference balls can also be executed. Moreover, since the specific location is located in a recovery passageway formed outside the gaming area 6 through which the game balls that have entered the gaming area 6 can be collected and passed through, the steel game balls that stick to the magnets more accurately. It is also possible to perform predetermined matters regarding game balls, specifically, control regarding the number of differential balls, while monitoring the presence of mixed balls. Furthermore, since the fraudulent notification is a notification indicating that a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet has been detected, the staff at the game store can easily understand that a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet has been detected. I can do it.

(Example of modification of second embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the second embodiment, based on an illegal ball detection signal from an illegal ball detection sensor 313a installed in a collection path formed outside the gaming area 6, it is determined whether steel game balls that stick to magnets are mixed in. However, the installation position of the detection sensor for determining whether a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet is mixed may be changed as appropriate. For example, an irregular ball detection sensor 313a may be installed in the firing area 7, which detects steel game balls that stick to a magnet, but does not detect stainless steel game balls.

Further, in the second embodiment, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a is installed in the collection path, but the pachinko gaming machine PY2 may be configured without the ejected ball detection sensor 310a. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, control and management regarding the number of differential pitches is performed based on the ejected pitch detection sensor 310a, but instead of or in addition to the number of differential pitches, other than the number of differential pitches may be used. Control and management regarding predetermined matters regarding game balls may be performed. Here, when the ejected ball detection sensor 310a detects an irregular ball, a malfunction or hindrance occurs in the control and management regarding predetermined matters regarding the game ball, but the malfunction or hindrance is detected based on the irregular ball detection signal. If the problem can be corrected, the frame control microcomputer 181 may appropriately perform processing to correct the problem or problem based on the irregular ball detection signal.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the ejected ball detection sensor 310a and the irregular ball detection sensor 313a are installed close to each other, but they are not close to each other and are separated to some extent (for example, separated by about 5 to 10 cm). (state)).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY2, the number of difference balls is counted, but for example, if the number of difference balls shows "+" in a situation where no game balls are fired and there are no game balls in the game area 6, This means that there is a possibility that an equal number of illegal balls are flowing into the pachinko game machine PY2. Therefore, the unit display device 300 or the display section 50a may be configured to be able to display the difference pitch count. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm that a fraud has occurred in which illegal balls are flown into the pachinko gaming machine PY2. Furthermore, by combining the number of differential pitches displayed on the unit display device 300 or the display section 50a and the presence or absence of fraudulent notification, it is possible to more accurately prevent fraudulent balls flowing into the pachinko machine PY2. It is possible to judge whether or not it has occurred.

(Example of change common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment)
Next, a modification example common to the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below. Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the pachinko gaming machine PY2 are referred to as "pachinko gaming machine PY1, etc.".

Although the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the like are configured as enclosed gaming machines, they may also be configured as gaming machines that allow players to touch game balls, like the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment. . In particular, even if the frame control microcomputer 181 is configured with a game machine such as a pachinko game machine PY in which a player can touch a game ball, the frame control microcomputer 181 is As in the above case, it is possible to execute frame control main processing, power-on processing (S5001), and frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005).

In addition, pachinko machines such as PY1 count (control and manage) the number of balls held based on fired balls and foul balls, but they also count (control and manage) the number of balls held based on ejected balls. Also good. In this case, when the frame control microcomputer 181 detects a discharged ball, it subtracts "1" from the number of held balls.

Furthermore, in pachinko gaming machines such as PY1, by operating the ball count display button 301k, the number of balls held at that time is displayed on the ball count display 301b, but the number of balls held display button 301k is not installed. Basically, the number of balls held at that time may be displayed on the number of balls held display 301b. Further, instead of or in addition to this, the display unit 50a may be configured to be able to display the number of balls held in a predetermined area. The conditions for displaying the number of balls held in this case can be set as appropriate, but for example, even if the number of balls held is enabled to be displayed during normal fluctuation or at all times, it may be possible to display the number of balls held when the first production button 40k is operated. Depending on the situation, the number of balls held may be displayed. Furthermore, the unit display device 300 may be configured to display the number of balls held. The conditions for displaying the number of balls held in this case can be set as appropriate, but for example, when an IC card is inserted in the card unit CU, the number of balls held may be displayed on the unit display device 300. good.

In addition, pachinko machines such as PY1 basically use stainless steel game balls that do not stick to magnets, but depending on the type of magnet etc. game balls may be used.

8. Other examples of changes Next, other examples of changes to the pachinko game machine PY according to the basic embodiment, the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, and the pachinko game machine PY2 according to the second embodiment are described below. explain. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machines PY, pachinko gaming machines PY1, and pachinko gaming machines PY2 will be referred to as "pachinko gaming machines PY, etc."

In pachinko gaming machines such as PY, the display unit 50a is used to variably display the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in order to notify the results of the special drawing lottery. (Slot machine)" A drum with a symbol displayed thereon may be provided, and the drum may be variably displayed to notify the result of the special drawing lottery.

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY, the big prize opening 14 can be opened in a jackpot game, but a winning area other than the big prize opening 14 that can be opened in a jackpot game may be provided.

Furthermore, in pachinko gaming machines such as PY, when a particular jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting conditions for the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the big winning device 14D, a second big winning device that can be opened and closed and into which a game ball can enter when opened is provided at a position in the gaming area 6 that can be reached by the game ball. In a predetermined round game, when the second big winning device is opened and the game ball that enters the second big winning device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side, a high probability state occurs as the jackpot game ends. may be set.

In this case, for example, the second jackpot device releases a specific jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol that makes it easy to set a high probability state) for a time when it is easy to enter the ball (for example, 29.5 seconds), and the second jackpot device A non-specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set a high probability state) that is released for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. Further, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the winning game ball can pass through the second grand prize winning device, and a sorting device is provided for distributing the game ball into the specific area and the non-specific area. Although the opening time of the second grand prize device is the same, the combination of the opening mode of the second grand prize device and the operating mode of the sorting device creates a jackpot pattern and a high probability state that make it easy to set a high probability state. It is also possible to provide jackpot symbols that are difficult to set.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine PY, etc., the game control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the performance control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the performance according to the progress of the game (control of the game). 120, game control and performance control are performed by different boards, but they may be configured to be performed by a single board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in that one board, or may be provided separately from that one board.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to other pinball gaming machines such as arranged ball machines and mahjong ball gaming machines, as well as reel-type gaming machines (so-called "slot machines").

8. Inventions Disclosed in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The following inventions A to K have been disclosed up to the previous paragraph in this [Detailed Description of the Invention]. In the descriptions of Inventions A to K, the names and expressions of corresponding components in the embodiments of the invention described above, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for the following inventions A1 to A6, invention B is a generic term for the following inventions B1 to B5, invention C is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C4, and invention D is a generic term for the following inventions A1 to A6. , Invention E is a generic term for the following inventions D1 to D4, Invention E is a generic term for the following inventions E1 to E3, Invention F is a generic term for the following inventions F1 to F5, and Invention G is the following invention G1. -G3, Invention H is a generic term for the following inventions H1 to H4, Invention I is a generic term for the following inventions I1 to I3, and Invention J is a generic term for the following inventions J1 to J2. Yes, invention K is a general term for the following inventions K1 to K5.

In addition, according to invention A, in order to solve problem 1 described below regarding the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-181256, it is possible to save space and reduce costs for the control means for firing game balls. It has the effect of being able to In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-181256, game balls are fired toward a gaming area at a predetermined period by a firing control board dedicated to a firing device that fires game balls. However, when installing a dedicated launch control board for launching game balls, it is necessary to secure a location for installing the board. Furthermore, the number of required parts such as connection harnesses increases, resulting in increased costs. Therefore, the first problem is to provide a gaming machine that can save space and reduce costs for the control means for firing game balls.

Furthermore, according to Invention B and Invention C, when the stored data becomes abnormal, for the problem 2 described below regarding the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-181256, when the data This has the effect of being able to restore the The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2019-181256 uses a microcomputer that includes processing measures such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) that executes predetermined control and storage devices such as a RAM (Random Access Memory) that stores data. It is installed. However, there is a possibility that the microcomputer may be initialized or damaged due to some influence. As a result, data stored in the microcomputer may become abnormal. Therefore, the second problem is to provide a gaming machine that can restore stored data when it becomes abnormal.

Furthermore, according to Invention D and Invention E, the number of game balls that can be used in a game (the number of balls held) can be solved for the problem 3 described below regarding the game machine described in JP-A-2013-192613. This has the effect of being able to recognize the number of balls held if an abnormality occurs in the control device that manages the ball electronically. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2013-192613, the number of balls held is sometimes electronically managed. However, if an abnormality occurs in the control device that electronically manages the number of balls held, and the actual number of balls held is no longer known, the player will suffer losses. Therefore, the third problem is to provide a gaming machine that can recognize the number of game balls when an abnormality occurs in the control device that electronically manages the number of balls held.

Furthermore, according to inventions F and G, game balls made of regular materials used in pachinko game machines can be detected to solve problem 4 described below regarding the game machine described in JP-A-2017-209224. At the same time, there is an effect that steel game balls can also be detected. In the game machine described in JP 2017-209224A, steel game balls were used. However, there has been a problem in that various frauds have been carried out using the material of the game balls, such as guiding steel game balls with magnets and making them enter the starting slot. Therefore, it may be possible to change the material of the game ball. However, even if the material of the game balls is changed, it is possible that fraud may occur in which steel game balls are mixed into the pachinko game machine. Furthermore, when playing a game with a pachinko game machine, it is also necessary to detect game balls made of a material other than regular steel used in the pachinko game machine. Therefore, the fourth problem is to provide a game machine that can detect game balls made of regular materials used in pachinko game machines, and can also detect game balls made of steel.

Furthermore, according to Invention H, Invention I, and Invention G, when the front door is opened, when the front door is opened, This has the effect of preventing game balls from flying out to the outside. In the game machine described in JP-A-2013-192613, the game area into which the fired game balls can enter is arranged inside the pachinko game machine. A front door that can be opened and closed is attached to the front side of the gaming area, and games are played with the pachinko gaming machine closed by the front door. When the pachinko game machine is closed by the front door, the game area and the outside are cut off by the front door, so the fired game balls will not fly out to the outside. However, when the front door is opened for some reason, there is a risk that the fired game balls may fly out and be lost. Therefore, problem 5 is to provide a game machine that can prevent the fired game balls from flying out to the outside when the front door is opened.

Further, according to invention K, it is possible to prevent mistakes in attaching the front door to a certain game board, which is effective in solving problem 6 described below regarding the game machine described in JP-A-2013-192613. The game machine described in JP-A-2013-192613 includes a game board and a front door that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the game board. In recent years, the game board and front door that make up one pachinko game machine are generally designed and manufactured by the same manufacturer, but the game board and the front door may be designed and manufactured by different manufacturers. Conceivable. As a result, for example, in a game parlor, there is a possibility that a front door of a different model may be attached to a certain game board. Further, even if the game board and the front door are designed and manufactured by the same manufacturer, there is a possibility that a different model of front door may be attached to a certain game board, for example, in a factory. Therefore, problem 6 is to provide a game machine that can prevent mistakes in attaching the front door to a certain game board.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to invention A1 is
A launching device (launching device 72) that launches a game ball;
A control means (frame control board 180) that performs control regarding the firing of game balls by the firing device and control regarding predetermined matters (such as the number of balls held) other than the firing of game balls,
The control means is capable of executing unit control related to one shot of a game ball at a predetermined period (600 msec),
A game machine characterized in that the unit control is comprised of firing a game ball and a firing standby in which the game ball is not fired until the next game ball is fired after the firing.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to invention A1,
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A game machine characterized in that, in response to the end of the unit control, a firing cycle change control in which game balls are not fired, which is different from the firing standby, may be executed.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to invention A2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the time associated with the firing cycle change control is shorter than the time associated with the predetermined cycle.

8-1-4. Invention A4
The gaming machine according to invention A4 is
A gaming machine according to invention A2 or invention A3,
The control means is capable of executing control at a predetermined minimum time interval (4 msec),
A gaming machine characterized in that the time related to the firing cycle change control and the time related to the predetermined cycle can be divided by the minimum time interval.

8-1-5. Invention A5
The gaming machine according to invention A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions A2 to A4,
The control means is capable of periodically executing specific control (unit firing control) related to firing the game ball multiple times,
A game machine characterized in that each specific control includes at least two or more of the unit controls of a first number (four times) and firing cycle change control of a second number (one time).

8-1-6. Invention A6
The gaming machine according to invention A6 is
A gaming machine according to invention A5,
Further comprising an operation means (a firing handle 72k) capable of accepting a specific operation (rotation operation) for firing the game ball,
The firing device fires a game ball in response to the specific operation received by the operating means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the control means is capable of periodically executing the specific control on the condition that the specific operation is accepted.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to invention B1 is
In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (frame control board 180) capable of executing predetermined control and a storage means (frame control RAM 184) capable of storing predetermined data,
The storage means includes a first storage section (number of balls held storage section 185) and a second storage section (frame control side number of balls held BU section 185),
The first storage unit stores data representing a specific item (number of balls held) as main data (number of balls held master data),
The second storage unit stores a plurality of pieces of data representing the specific items as sub data (frame control side ball count BU data),
When the control means determines that the storage means is abnormal, the control means determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied for the plurality of sub-data (if the number of balls held by the frame control side ball number BU data is all the same). and if it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the main data is newly generated based on the plurality of sub data and stored in the first storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the control means may determine whether or not the storage means is abnormal when power is supplied to the gaming machine.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2,
A game machine characterized in that the specific item is the number of game media (number of balls held) that can be used for the game.

8-2-4. Invention B4
The gaming machine according to invention B4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions B1 to B3,
The second storage unit stores three or more pieces of the sub data,
The predetermined condition is that the contents represented by the sub data all match;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means stores data representing contents that are the same in all of the sub data in the first storage section as the main data.

8-2-5. Invention B5
The gaming machine according to invention B5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions B1 to B3,
The second storage unit stores three or more pieces of the sub data,
The predetermined condition is that the content represented by the sub data matches a predetermined number of pieces that is more than half of the number of pieces of the sub data,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means stores, as the main data, data representing contents that match a predetermined number of pieces, which is more than half of the number of pieces of the sub-data, in the first storage unit.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to invention C1 is
Specific control means (frame control means 180) that performs control regarding predetermined matters (number of balls held) that may change as the game progresses;
comprising non-specific control means (game control means 100) different from the specific control means,
The specific control means includes a specific storage unit (frame control RAM 184) that stores first data (ball possession master data) representing the predetermined items;
The non-specific control means has a non-specific storage unit (gaming RAM 104) that stores second data (game control side held ball number BU data) representing the predetermined items,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of balls held is updated), the specific control means sends third data (a command for updating the number of balls held) including the predetermined item represented by the first data to the non-specific control means. send,
A gaming machine characterized in that, upon receiving the third data, the non-specific control means updates the second data stored in the non-specific storage unit based on the third data.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The specific control means may newly generate the first data based on the second data and store it in the specific storage unit when it is determined that the specific storage unit is abnormal. A gaming machine with special features.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific control means may determine whether or not the specific storage section is abnormal when power is supplied to the gaming machine.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The gaming machine according to invention C4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions C1 to C3,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined item is the number of game media (number of balls held) that can be used for the game.

8-3-5. Invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions C1 to C4,
The specific control means is capable of updating the first data stored in the specific storage unit according to the progress of the game,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined condition includes that the specific control means updates the first data.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to invention D1 is
A specific control means (frame control board 180) that controls the number of game media (number of balls held) that a player can use in a game;
Display means (image display device 50);
The specific control means has a specific storage unit (frame control RAM 184) that stores data indicating the number of gaming media that can be used by a player in a game, and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific storage unit. There are things to do,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display means is capable of displaying the number of game media that can be used by a player in a game when the specific control means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the specific storage section.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1,
It further includes an operable operation means (first production button 40k),
A gaming machine characterized in that the display means is capable of displaying the number of game media that can be used by a player in a game, on the condition that the operation means is operated in a predetermined manner (long press operation).

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined operation can be executed during a predetermined period when no game is being played.

8-4-4. Invention D4
The gaming machine according to invention D4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions D1 to D3,
A non-specific control means (game control means 100) different from the specific control means,
The non-specific control means is capable of executing control regarding the game, and has a non-specific storage unit (gaming RAM 104) that stores data indicating the number of gaming media that can be used by the player in the game;
The display means is capable of executing a display effect according to the game played by the non-specific control means,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of balls held is updated), the specific control means controls a specific control unit that includes the number of gaming media that can be used by the player in a game, which is represented by the data stored in the specific storage unit. Sending data (number of balls held update designation command) to the non-specific control means,
When the non-specific control means receives the specific data, the non-specific control means updates the number of gaming media that can be used by the player in a game, which is stored in the non-specific storage unit, based on the specific data;
The display means is capable of displaying the number of gaming media that can be used by a player in a game, based on data stored in the non-specific storage unit that indicates the number of gaming media that can be used in a game by a player. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to invention E1 is
A specific control means (frame control board 180) that controls the number of game media (number of balls held) that a player can use in a game;
Display means (number of balls held display device 300);
The specific control means has a specific storage unit (frame control RAM 184) that stores first number data (ball possession master data) representing the number of gaming media that can be used by the player in a game;
The display means includes a non-specific storage unit (display device side ball count BU unit 301d) that stores second number data (display device side ball count BU data) representing the number of game media that can be used by the player in a game. ), and is capable of displaying the number of game media that can be used by a player in a game, which is indicated by the second number data stored in the non-specific storage unit.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of balls held is updated), the specific control means updates specific data (number of balls held) including the number of gaming media that can be used in a game by the player represented by the first number data. transmitting an update designation signal) to the display means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, upon receiving the specific data, the display means updates the second number data stored in the non-specific storage unit based on the specific data.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to invention E2,
The specific control means is capable of updating the first number data stored in the specific storage unit according to the progress of the game,
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined condition includes that the specific control means updates the first number data.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to invention F1 is
A game machine that plays a game by letting a stainless steel game ball flow down into a game area (game area 6),
A specific detection sensor (irregular ball detection sensor 313a) that detects steel game balls that stick to a magnet but does not detect stainless steel game balls;
and a control means (frame control board 180),
When the specific detection sensor detects a steel game ball sticking to a magnet, it outputs a specific detection signal (illegal ball detection signal) indicating the detection to the control means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means is capable of executing specific notification (unauthorized notification) based on input of the specific signal.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to invention F1,
It further includes a non-specific detection sensor (discharged ball detection sensor 310a) that detects steel game balls that stick to magnets and stainless steel game balls,
When the non-specific detection sensor detects a steel game ball or a stainless steel game ball that sticks to a magnet, it outputs a non-specific detection signal (ejected ball detection signal) indicating the detection to the control means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the control means is capable of executing control regarding a predetermined matter regarding game balls (difference number of balls) based on input of the non-specific signal.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to invention F2,
A game machine characterized in that the specific detection sensor and the non-specific detection sensor are installed close to each other near a specific location through which a game ball can pass.

8-6-4. Invention F4
The gaming machine according to invention F4 is
A gaming machine according to invention F3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific location is located in a passageway (collection passageway) formed outside the gaming area through which game balls that have entered the gaming area can be collected and passed through.

8-6-5. Invention F5
The gaming machine according to invention F5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions F1 to F4,
A game machine characterized in that the specific notification is a notification indicating that a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet has been detected.

8-7-1. Invention G1
The gaming machine according to invention G1 is
A game machine that plays a game by letting a stainless steel game ball flow down into a game area (game area 6),
A detection sensor (ejected ball detection sensor 310a) that detects steel game balls that stick to magnets and stainless steel game balls;
and a control means (frame control board 180),
When the detection sensor detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet or a stainless steel game ball, it outputs a detection signal (ejected ball detection signal) indicating the detection to the control means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the detection signal is input, the control means measures the time period during which the detection signal is input.

8-7-2. Invention G2
The gaming machine according to invention G2 is
A gaming machine according to invention G1,
If the time period during which the detection signal is input is longer than a predetermined value (unauthorized designated time), the control means performs a specific notification (unauthorized notification) indicating that a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet has been detected. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-7-3. Invention G3
The gaming machine according to invention G3 is
A gaming machine according to invention G1 or invention G2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the detection sensor is installed in a passageway (collection passageway) formed outside the gaming area through which game balls that have entered the gaming area can be collected and passed through.

8-8-1. Invention H1
The gaming machine according to invention H1 is
This game machine is formed with a game area (game area 6) through which the fired game ball can flow down, and a firing area (launch area 7) through which the fired game ball can pass through in order to head toward the game area. hand,
The firing area is provided with a movable part (an entry prevention movable part 76k) that can be switched between a standby state and an active state,
The movable part allows a game ball moving toward the game area to pass through in the standby state, and does not allow a game ball to move toward the game area to pass through in the active state.

8-8-2. Invention H2
The gaming machine according to invention H2 is
A gaming machine according to invention H1,
Further comprising a firing means (launching device 7) for firing the game ball,
A gaming machine characterized in that a collection port is formed between the firing means and the movable part to collect game balls moving from the gaming area toward the firing means as foul balls.

8-8-3. Invention H3
The gaming machine according to invention H3 is
A gaming machine according to invention H1 or invention H2,
It comprises a frame-shaped inner frame (inner frame 22), and a game board 1 in which the game area is formed and is fitted into an opening (opening 1A) formed in the inner frame,
The firing means is installed in the inner frame,
The firing area is formed across the inner frame and the game board,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the movable part is a part formed in the inner frame of the firing area and is arranged near a boundary between the inner frame and the game board.

8-8-4. Invention H4
The gaming machine according to invention H4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions H1 to H3,
Further comprising a front door (front door 23) supported by the inner frame so as to be openable and closable on the front side of the gaming area and the firing area,
The gaming machine characterized in that the movable part may switch from the standby state to the operating state in response to the front door being opened.

8-9-1. Invention I1
The gaming machine according to invention I1 is
A front door (front door 23) supported so as to be openable and closable on the front side of the game area (game area 6) through which the launched game balls can flow down, and a detection means (door) for detecting that the front door is opened. A gaming machine comprising an open detection sensor 23a),
When the opening of the front door is not detected by the detection means, the game ball is allowed to enter the gaming area, and when the detection means detects the opening of the front door, the game ball is allowed to enter the game area. A gaming machine characterized in that entry into the gaming area may be blocked.

8-9-2. Invention I2
The gaming machine according to invention I2 is
A gaming machine according to invention I1,
A firing area (launching area 7) through which the gaming ball can pass in order to head toward the gaming area is formed downstream of the gaming area with respect to the firing of the gaming ball,
When the opening of the front door is not detected by the detection means, the game balls moving toward the game area in the firing area are allowed to enter the game area, and the detection means detects the opening of the front door. A game machine characterized in that, in response to detection of an opening of a game ball, a game ball that is moving toward the game area in the firing area may be prevented from entering the game area.

8-9-3. Invention I3
The gaming machine according to invention I3 is
A gaming machine according to invention I2,
The launch area includes a movable part (an entry prevention movable part) that can be switched between a standby state in which a game ball moving toward the game area passes through, and an operating state in which a game ball that moves toward the game area does not pass through. 76k) is provided,
The movable part is normally held in the standby state, and may be switched from the standby state to the operating state in response to detection of opening of the front door by the detection means. .

8-10-1. Invention J1
The gaming machine according to invention J1 is
A gaming machine comprising a front door (front door 23) supported in an openable/closable manner on the front side of a gaming area (gaming area 6) through which the fired game balls can flow down,
The front door is provided with a lock (lock 302) capable of keeping the front door closed and releasing the closure,
A detection means (unlock detection sensor 302a) for detecting release of the closure by the lock is provided,
When the release of the closure is not detected by the detection means, firing of the game ball may be enabled, and in response to the release of the closure being detected by the detection means, the release of the game ball may be prohibited. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-10-2. Invention J2
The gaming machine according to invention J2 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
Further comprising a firing means (launching device 72) for firing the game ball,
When the release of the closure is not detected by the detection means, the firing means can cause the game ball to be fired, and in response to the detection means detecting the release of the closure, the firing means can fire the game ball. A game machine characterized in that the means cannot cause the game ball to be fired.

8-11-1. Invention K1
The gaming machine according to invention K1 is
A board (upper frame lamp driver board 162) on which input/output ports having multiple terminals (upper frame lamp input/output port 162a, lower frame lamp input/output port 163a, production button input/output port 165a) are mounted. , a lower frame lamp driver board 163, and a production button relay board 165),
An address related to the input/output port is set by some of the plurality of terminals,
A gaming machine characterized in that the address includes specific unique information (manufacturer identification information) representing a predetermined attribute (manufacturer).

8-11-2. Invention K2
The gaming machine according to invention K2 is
A gaming machine according to invention K1,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined attribute is a company that manufactured the gaming machine.

8-11-3. Invention K3
The gaming machine according to invention K3 is
A gaming machine according to invention K2,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined attribute is a model of the gaming machine.

8-11-4. Invention K4
The gaming machine according to invention K4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions K1 to K3,
It further includes a game board (game board 1), a front door (front door 23) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the game board, and a control means (performance control board 120),
the board is installed on the front door,
The control means is installed on the game board,
Basic unique information representing the predetermined attribute is stored in the control means,
When the predetermined attribute represented by the basic unique information and the predetermined attribute represented by the specific unique information are different, the control means suggests that the game board and the front door are not aligned. A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute specific notification (frame nonconformity error notification).

8-11-5. Invention K5
The gaming machine according to invention K5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions K1 to K4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the address includes the specific unique information and individual information (device identification information) associated with each board.

PY, PY1, PY2...Pachinko game machine 1...Game board 6...Game area 7...Fire area 11...First starting port 11a...First starting port sensor 12...Second starting port 12a...Second starting port sensor 14...Large Winning opening 14a...Big winning opening sensor 22...Inner frame 23...Front door 23a...Door open detection sensor 40...First production button device 40k...First production button 40m...Production button motor 50...Image display device 50a...Display section 52... Speaker 53... Frame lamp 53U... Upper frame lamp 53D... Upper frame lamp 72... Launch device 72a... Touch switch 72b... Launch volume knob 72k... Launch handle 72m... Launch motor 76... Entry prevention device 76k... Entry prevention movable part 100...Game control board 101...Game control microcomputer 104...Game RAM
106...Game control side number of balls held BU unit 120...Production control board 121...Production control microcomputer 128...Controller 129...RTC
140... Image control board 180... Frame control board 181... Frame control microcomputer 182... Frame control CPU
183...Frame control ROM
184...RAM for frame control
185... Number of balls held storage unit 186... Frame control side number of balls held BU section 186a... First number of balls held BU section 186b... Second number of balls held BU section 186c... Third side number of balls held BU section 162... Upper frame lamp Driver board 162a...Input/output port for upper frame lamp 163...Driver board for lower frame lamp 163a...Input/output port for lower frame lamp 165...Relay board for production button 165a...I/O port for production button 190...Power supply board 300... Unit display device 301...Ball count display device 301a...Display button detection sensor 301b...Ball count display 301d...Display control side ball count BU section 301k...Ball count display button 302...Lock 302a...Unlock detection sensor 310a ...Ejected ball detection sensor 311a...Ejected ball detection sensor 312a...Foul ball detection sensor 313a...Illegal ball detection sensor CU...Card unit

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with a control means capable of executing predetermined control and a storage means capable of storing predetermined data,
The storage means includes a first storage section and a second storage section,
The first storage unit stores, as main data, data representing specific matters that can be changed as the game progresses;
The second storage unit stores a plurality of pieces of data representing the specific matter as sub data,
The control means includes:
When the specific matter changes as the game progresses, the main data is updated according to the change,
updating all of the plurality of sub-data at the same timing based on the main data;
If it is determined that at least a portion of the storage means including the first storage section and the second storage section is abnormal, a predetermined condition is satisfied for the plurality of sub-data stored in the second storage section. If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the main data may be newly generated based on the plurality of sub data and stored in the first storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by certain things.

Images